Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 201

Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10

Ngày soạn :
TUẦN I 08./08/2009
Period:1 Ngày dạy : 12./08/2009

INTRODUCING THE PROGRAMS OF ENGLISH 10


***
***
I.OBJECTIVE:
Guiding students how to learn English 10
II.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking Ss to answer some questions:
3- New lesson:
T Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
WARMER -UP: Lucky Number -Work in group of two.
-T divides the whole class into two The leader of each group
groups and play game chooses a number for your own
1.Lucky Number group and do the following
2.How many boys are there in your requirement in each question.If
class? the answer is correct,they will
3.Do you know what your English get 10 marks.
teacher’s name is?
4.Lucky Number
5.What do you prepare for this
semester?
6.Do you like studying English ?Why
or Why not ?
7.How do you learn English well?
8.Do you speak English fluently?
PRESENTATION: -Students listen to T’s
I-Content: Including six topics explanation about six topics
1.You and me
2.Education
3.Community
4.Recreation
5.Nature and Environment -Listen and take notes in their
6.People and places notebooks.
-> six topics are divided into sixteen
units
II-The design of each unit in
textbook:
1.Unit: express the theme
2.Reading:developing reading skill
3.Speaking:developing speaking skill
4.Listening:developing listenning skill
5.Writing:developing writing skill
6.Language focus:learning grammar -Listen and take notes in their
and pronounciation notebooks.
-After 3 unit , you have one period for

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page1 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
test yourself.It helps you test yourself
about what you’ve learnt.
III-Test:
1-check frequence knowledge for the
previous lesson.
2-Fifteen minutes test (3 times)
3-One period test (2 times )
4-Semester test (Once for each
semester)
IV-The new point in learning E 10 Work in pair and make a small
-Communicative method /approach conversation with a friend.
-Task - based method /teaching
-The book is designed with 4 skills
-Commplete and various tests
- Learner - centered approach
V-Results:
PRODUCTION
-T asks Ss to work in pairs and make
acquainted with a friend by using
suggested questions:
1.What’s your name?
2.How old are you?
3.Where do you live?
4.Where do you study?
5.What subjects do you study at
school?
6.What’s your favourite subject?Why
do you like it?
7.What do you often do in your free-
time?
8.What do you want to be in the
future?

4-Consolidation:-Retell what you’ve learnt and what you willprepare for


this semester
5-Homework -Prepare Unit1 Lesson1:READING

Ngày
TUẦN I Unit 1.A DAY IN THE LIFE OF...........
soạn :...../08/2009
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page2 NgàyNhất
THPT Thống dạy : :
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
Period:2
A.READING

I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to improve reading skills as scan for
specific information and guessing meaning of words based on context

II.TEACHING AIDS: text book


III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: No check
3- New lesson: Lesson 1 :READING
T Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
WARM UP
-T asks Ss to close your textbooks and Ss listen to T’s requirement
then share handouts. Ss work in groups of four
-T asks Ss to match the work and places
together.
1.teacher
a.market
2.doctor b.school
3.worker
c.hospital -Ss work in pair:Ask and answer the
4.seller d.field same model.
5.farmer e.factory
-After 3 minutes ,T goes around the
class and asks Ss
T:Where does a teacher
work?
S:He/she works at a school
.............................................................
-T : to understand more about the life of Ss answer T’s questions and
a famer, today we learn Unit 1. Brainstorming:Farmer
PRE-READING ->He leads the buffalo to the field.
Activity1:Describe the picture
-T asks Ss to look at the picture on page
12 and talk about the activities of Ss read silent through the text and
people in the picture find newwords and phrases
* Who is he /she? Ss listen to teacher’s explanation
* What is he/ she doing? and take notes
* where is he/ she doing?...
Activity2:Present vocabulary:
T helps Ss to explain some newwords
+ peasant [ pezent]= farmer
+to lead the buffalo to the field.
+to plough and harrow: The whole class pronounce all words
+to repair the banks of the pilot of land in chorus.
( translation):
+ fellow peasant(n) farmer working in -Work individually and compare the
the same field. answer with a partner.
+to pump water: Expected answer:
+To take a short rest(translation):to 1C ,2C ,3A ,4A
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page3 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
have a rest for a short time.
+transplant (v):grow rice
-T asks Ss to pronounce above words
and phrases loudly in chorus
WHILE- READING -Work in pairs
-T asks Ss to read through the text and Expected answer:
practise TASK in textbook 1.He’s a peasant or farmer
TASK1:Multiple choice 2.He gets up at 4.30 and then he
-T asks Ss to read the passages goes down.......
individually and choose the option A,B or -Work in groups
C that best suits the meaning of the
italicised words.
-T goes around the class and provides
helf if necessary.
-T calls on some Ss to read aloud their -Work in small groups of four and
answers. Ask them to explain their then representive of each group
choice. present their ideas in front of class.
TASK2:Answering Questions:
-Have Ss work in pair and ask and
answer about the passages
-Call on some pair to do the task in front
of the class.
-Give feedback and suggested answers
TASK 3:Note completion
-T ask Ss to scan the passage and make
a brief note about Mr Vy and Mrs Tuyet’s
daily routines.
-Tell Ss to compare their notes with a
friend.
-Give correct answer
POST- READING
T asks Ss to close your textbooks and
discuss about the activities of daily life
Mr Vy and Mr Tuyet.
Talking about activities of daily life of
your parents.
4-Consolidation:-Talk about activities of somebody’s daily life
5-Homework -Learn newwords and phrases by heart
- Prepare next lesson SPEAKING

TUẦN I Unit 1.A DAY IN THE LIFE OF...........


Ngày
Period:3 soạn :...../08/2009
B. SPEAKING Ngày
I.OBJECTIVE:
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page4 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to:
- speak about one’s daily life
II.TEACHING AIDS:handouts; text book
III.PROCEDURE
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking a student to talk about your parent’s activities of
daily life
3- New lesson: Lesson 2 :SPEAKING
T Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
WARM UP
-T gives handouts that writes ten subjects on Ss work in group of two
the blackboard. Ss have 3 minutes to
1.Civic education remember all subjects and
6.Biology then write down them on
2.Technology the blackboard.If the group
7.Chemistry has more correct
3.Mathematics words,they will be winner.
8.History
4.Physics -Ss work individually and
9.Geography the compare their answers
5.Literature with a friend.
10.Physical education Expected answer:
-T intoduce the new- lesson 1d,2c,3b,4a,5e,6g,7h,8f
PRE-SPEAKING
How to say the time .
-to help Ss to revise how to say the time,T
asks Ss to match a number A with a suitable
phrase in B
Handout1:
A B
7:15 a.a quarter to ten
8:05 b.five to nine
8:55 c.five past eight
9:45 d.a quarter past Ss look at Quan weekly
10:40 seven timetable and work in pairs.
17:00 e.twenty to eleven
6:00 f.half past six p.m
18:30 g.five o’clock p.m
h.six o’clock a.m
-T can help Ss remember the ways to say the
time
WHILE- SPEAKING
-T asks Ss to practise TASK in textbook
TASK1:Set the scene
-T asks Ss to look at Quan weekly timetable on
page 15.Ask and answer questions with a
partner,using the information from the Ss work individually and
timetable. talk about Quan’s activities,
Model:T makes a short dialogue with a using the picture .
student Note :Use some
T: What time does Quan have Civic conjunctions such
education less on Moday? as:Then..........
After..........
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page5 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
S:He has Civic education at a quarter past After that..
seven on Monday. Last.........
T:What lesson does Quan have at quarter -Ss work individually and
past seven on Monday? then present in front of
S:He has Civic education lesson . class.
TASK2:Describe the picture
-T keeps Ss work in pair and ask them to study .
the picture.T may help by asking questions
such as:
*What is Quan doing in picture A?
* Is he getting up ?
*What time does he getup?.........
-T goes around the class and provides helf if
necessary.
-T calls on some Ss to Speak aloud their
answers.
POST- SPEAKING
T asks Ss to close your textbooks and tell
your classmates about your daily rountine.
Note:Ss only talk about their main / important
activities.
-T calls some Ss to present in front of class and
give them mark.

4-Consolidation:-Ask and answer about somebody’s daily routine


5-Homework -Write a short passage about 50 words about your daily life
- Prepare next lesson LISTENING

TUẦN 2 Unit 1. A DAY IN THE LIFE OF...........


Ngày
soạn :...../..../2009
Ngày dạy : :...../.../2009
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page6 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
Period:4
LISTENING
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to develop such listening skill as listen for
specific information

II.TEACHING AIDS: text book; cassette player


III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Calling 2students to go to the blackboard:Ask abd answer about
someboby’s daily life.
3- New lesson: Lesson 3 :LISTENING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
WARM UP:Categorising
-T asks to work in groups and put the Ss work in group of three
sentences into the correct column: Each group put the sentences
He is a He is a He is a cyclo into the column of their group
teacher farmer driver

He gets up very early He works in


the school
He works in the streets He gets
people from one place to He works
with children another.
He lives in the country He meets a
lot of people
He corrects homework He works in
a farm.
PRE-LISTENING
Activity1:Ask and answer Work in pairs.
- Tell Ss to work in pair to ask and answer the
following questions:
1.Have you ever travelled by cyclo?
2.When was it ?
3.Is it interesting to travel by cyclo?
4.Which do you prefer, going by bicycle or by
cyclo ? give reasons.
Activity 2:Pronounce these words Listen and repeat after T
( textbook) Take notes some meaning of
-T can explain these words quickly and asks Ss newwords
to listen and repeat
+ district (n): smaller than a province
+drop (v):leave somebody at a place:
+ pedal ['pedl] (n): baøn đạp
WHILE- LISTENING
-TASK1:Matching pictures Work in group and describe the
-T asks Ss to open their textbooks and pictures in textbook
describe the pictures first.Then T asks Ss to
discuss the groups to guess the correct order
of pictures. Listen to the tape and give their
-Play the tape twice and checks the class. answers.
-Play the tape the last time and give feedback. Expected

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page7 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
answer:1e,2f,3a,4c,5b,6d
TASK2:True or false Expected answer:
-T asks Ss to read the statements carefully 1F(not given)
first. 2T
-Play the tape again and ask Ss to listen and 3F( He takes his passengers from
decide whether the statements are true or District 5 to District 1)
false. 4F( His first passenger is an old
-Call on some Ss to explain their answers man)
5F(He has lunch at a food stall
AFTER- LISTENING near Ben Thanh Market)
Tell Ss to work in pairs and ask and answer 6F(He takes a short a rest)
questions about Mr.Lam’s Activities by using
the cues below.
Name............................start......................wor Pair-work
k......................lunch
......................occupation......................passen
gers......................rest
-T goes around the class and offer help if
necessary.
-Call on some pairs and ask and answer in
front of class.
Suggested answers:
1.What is the man’s name?
2.What does he do? .
3.What time does he start work?
4.Who are his passengers?Is his first
passenger an old man?
5.Where does he have lunch?
6.Does he take a rest?
-From above imfotmation ,retell the story in
front of class.

4-Consolidation:-Retell the story that you have just listen


5-Homework -Write a story about 50 words about Mr Lam
- Prepare next lesson WRITING

TUẦN 2 Unit 1.A DAY IN THE LIFE OF....


Ngày soạn :...../.../2009
Ngày
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page8 dạyNhất
THPT Thống : :...../..../2009
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
Period:5
D.WRITING
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to:
-write a narrative
II.TEACHING AIDS: text book
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking a student to retell the story about Mr Lam
3- New lesson: Lesson 4 :WRITING
T Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
WARM UP:Answer questions -Ss listen to T’s Questions
-T asks Ss to close their textbooks and answer and answer :
Qs: 1.Yes, I have/ No, I haven’t
1.Have you ever heard a frightening story / an 2.It happened when I was
4’ interesting story ? young ../when I was in the
2.When did it happen? 10th grade...
3.Where did it happen? 3.At my house/in my school/
4.How did you feel about that? In my neighbourhood...
-T introduces the situation.Now we study a 4.It made me frightened/
frightening story happy / bored.
PRESENTATION -Work in groups and list all
Activity 1:Read the story verbs and the connectors
-T helps Ss to read the story and find all the Expected answer:
verbs that used in the past simple and the Started took of
connectors( time expressions)in the story. was/were
-T goes around to help if necessary Announced began got
-T calls on some Ss to give answers Arrived felt realized
-T can explain the form and uses of the Simple -At first,then,just,on that
6’ Past day, a few minutes later,
*It is used to express a habit ,an action in one hour later.
the past -Ss listen to T’s eliciting
Activity 2:Vocabulary -Ss copy down
+ be due to (a): because of, owing to
+ stare death in the face(v): so scared, afraid
+ take off (v) (plane) leave the ground
+ air hostess(n) person who takes care of
passengers on a plane
+ be in danger(v) to be in dangerous situation

PRACTICE
Activity 1: Practise TASK in textbook -Work in groups
TASK2-T explains to Ss the format of a narrative: Expected answer:
the vents, the climax, and the conclusion. The events:got on plane,
-T instructs the requirement in task 2 and skim plane took off, hostesses
the text and then identify the events, the climax, were just begginning to
and conclusion serve lunch when began to

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page9 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
-T goes around the class and offer help ifr necessary shake, plane seemed to
-T asks Ss to report their results dip,people sreamed in
7’ panic.
The climax:We thought we
had only minutes to live.
The conclusion:Pilot
PRODUCTION: announced that everything
TASK3:Write a narrative was all right, we landed
-Ask them to work individually , use the promts in task safely
1 to build up a narrative about a hotel fire. -Work individually, then the
-Encourge Ss to finish the writing under time whole class.
presure
-Ask Ss to have peer correction
- Call on some Ss to read aloud their writng in
front of calss
-T comments and corrects mistakes if necessary.

4-Consolidation: -How to write a narrative?


-Which tenses do you use in your passage

5-Homework: -Complete your writing


- Prepare next lesson LANGUAGE FOCUS

TUẦN 2 Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF...........


Ngày
Period:6 soạn :...../..../2009
Ngày
E. LANGUAGE FOCUS

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page10 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
I.OBJECTIVE:
By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to :
-identify the sounds :/ I / and / i : /
-Reviewing the present and past simple tense and adverbs of frequency

II. TEACHING AIDS: text book


III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Writing a sentence with suggested words
3- New lesson: Lesson 4 :LANGUAGE FOCUS
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
WARMER:Categorising
-T asks Ss to work in groups and give out -Group work
10 to 15 words and tell Ss to put them
under correct heading
Adv of Adv of Adv of
manner frequency time

Advebs:tommorow, sometimes, carefully,


beautifully. Yesterday,always,never, a few -Listen and repeat in chorus
days ago,usefully....... -Note: /ea/->meat
PRONOUNCIATION: /I/ - /i:/ /e/ ->we,equal.me, these
1.Example: sheep ship /ee/ ->sheep, need,bee /
/i:/ /I/ i:/
-T helps Ss to distinguish two sounds /ie/ ->releive, believe
-Ask them to listen and repeat -Work individually
2.Practice: -Then speak loudly
-Open their textbooks and practise the
sentences
-Calls on some Ss to pronounce two sounds
- Peer correction -Ss listen to T and cope notes
GRAMMAR AND VOCABULARY
Review the present simple tense and -Work individually
past tense Expected answer:
-T asks Ss to work in pairs and discuss the 1is, 2 fish,3worry,4 are,5 catch,6 am,
form and use of the present simple tense, 7 catch,8 go,9 give up,10 says, 11
past tense realize.12am.
- T takes notes on the blackboard.
Exercise 1:complete the blanks in the
passage, use the correct present simple
form of the verbs in the box.
-Ask Ss to compare the answers with a
friend.
-Calls on some Ss to read the completed Work individually
passage Expected answer:
Exercise 2 1.He usually gets up early
-T asks Ss to revise the adverbs of 2.She is never late for school
frequency: 3.Lan sometimes practises speaking
Note: the position of advs English
+As a rule:at the beginning 4.Thao is always a hard -working
+Usually, sometimes, always.....:stand student.
after be, before ordinary Verb, between an
auxilary V and the main V
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page11 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
-T asks Ss to do exercise 2
-Feedback and give suggested answer Work in pairs
Exercise 3 Expected answer:
-T asks Ss to work in pairs and supply the 1.was done 10.crept
correct past simple form of the verbs in the 2.cooked 11.slept
blanks 3.were 12.woke
Note :verb past: Regular 4.smelt 13.was
verb 5.told 14.leapt
6.sang 15.hurried
Irregular 7.began 16.found
verb 8.felt 17.wound
-Calls on some Ss to read the completed 9.put out 18.flowed
passage aloud in front of class

4-Consolidation:-Pronounce:/i:/-/I/
-Tenses: simple present and simple past(form, use and adverbs)
5-Homework: -Practise all exercises again and completely
- Prepare Unit 2 lesson 1 READING

TUẦN 3 Unit 2. SCHOOL TALKS Ngày


Period:7 soạn :...../...../2009
Ngày
A. READING
I.OBJECTIVES:
I-By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to:
-Develop such micro reading skills as scanning for specific information and
guessing meaning in context

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page12 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
II.TEACHING AIDS: Text book
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking Ss to answer some questions about daily life.
3- New lesson: Lesson 1:READING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
WARMER:Brainstorming:SCHOOL
-T asks Ss to give a picture about school -Group work of four and give more words
and asks Ss to descride it that are related to school
school yard

teachers school
playing

games

plants

-Tasks:When you meet your friend, Which


topics do you often talk about? -Work individually
SCHOOL TALKS -Ss read all words in chorus
PRE-READING -take notes
Activity 1 Present vocabulary Like
-T asks Ss to read through the text and Enjoy + V-ing
find out newwords and phrases Love
+ international language(n) Want
+hard(adj) Hope + to-inf
+ to be far + from (exp) Decide
+ traffic(n)
-T asks Ss to pronounce these words
WHILE YOU READ -Work in silent and then compare the
TASK 1: GAP- FILLING answers with a friend
-T asks Ss to complete each one blank Expected answer:
with one of the words in the box .There 1.enjoy 4.crowed
are more words than the blanks. 2.traffic 5.language
- Have Ss compare the answers with a 3.worry
friend
- Feedback and give correct answers -Work in pairs
Expected answer:
TASK2 :Finding who .......... Enjoy teaching Miss Phuong
-T asks Ss to work in pairs .Read the small Has to get up early Phong
talks again and find out who....... ........................................................
-Encourage Ss to discuss with their
partners to get the correct answers
- Call on some pairs to explain their
answers to class. -Work in pairs
-Give correct answers Expected answer:
TASK 3: Answering questions 1.He studies at Chu Van An High school
-T asks Ss to keep on working in pairs 2.He studies many subjects such as Math,

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page13 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
.Read the talks more carefully and answer Physics, Chemistry..
the questions 3.Because it is an international language.
-Calls on some Ss to read aloud the 4.She says that teaching is hard work, but
answers of the class she enjoys it beacause she loves working
with children.
-Feedback and give correct answers
5.Beacause his son has to ride his bike in
narrow and crowed streets on the way to
school.

-Work in groups and one representative


of each group will present their topic

POST- READING
*Tell Ss to work in groups : choose one of
the following topics and talk about 5
minutes.
-T goes to different groups and offer help
if necessary.

IV-Consolidation:-Talk about the problems in school

V-Homework -Write a paragraph about yourself ,using a first paragraph as a frame


- Prepare Unit 2 lesson 2 SPEAKING

TUẦN 3 Unit 2.SCHOOL TALKS Ngày


Period:8 soạn :...../..../2009
Ngày
B.SPEAKING
I.OBJECTIVE:
By the end of the lesson students will be able to make small talks in daily life.

II. TEACHING AIDS: Text book


III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking Ss to answer some questions in previous lesson.
3- New lesson: Lesson 2:SPEAKING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
WARMER:Jumpled words

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page14 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
-T asks Ss to work in groups and rearrange -Pair-work
the jumpled words to make complete Expected answer:
sentences 1.It has been very nice talking to
1.has,nice,to,you,talking,been,it,very. you.
2.weekend,did,nice,have,a you? 2.Did you have a nice weekend?
3.up,later,catch,you,with. 3.Catch up with you later.
4.school,everything,how,at is? 4.How’s everything at school?
-T corrects and asks Ss to give the open and -Listen to T
end conversation
=> Today we will practise speaking
conversation having starting and closing
conversation
PRESENTATION
TASK 1:Giving Instruction -Work in pairs
-T asks Ss to to give the expressions to open Expected answer:
or end a dialogue. Starting Closing
-Have Ss work in pairs to put the expressions -Good morning/Hi Sorry, I’ve
which are commonly used in making small got to go -How’s
talks under appropriate heading everything Talk to you later
Starting a Closing a at school
conversation conversation Goodbye,See you
-Hello, how are you?
-Have Ss to practise these expressions with later
his/ her partner. -Hello!What are you Great.I’ll see
-Feedback and give correct answers you
doing? tomorrow.
TASK 2 :Rearranging Sentences -Hi,how is school? Catch up
-Tasks Ss to work in pairs to rearrange the with you
sentences to make an apprpriate later
conversation.
Let them have 3 minutes , then calls on some -Work in pairs
pairs to practise the conversation in front of Expected answer:
class. 1D 4H 7G
-Comment on Ss’s performance and give 2F 5E 8A
feedback 3B 6C

TASK 3: Conversation Completion


-T asks Ss to keep on work in pairs : Pair - work
Complete the conversation with suitable Expected answer:
words, phrases or sentences in the box. A.......What’s the matter with you ?
-Calls on some pairs to practise the B........I feel tired.I’ve got headache
completed conversation in front of the class. A........You’d better go home and I
have a rest
B........
POST- SPEAKING
-Work in groups :Make small talks on the -Work in groups ,discuss the topics
following topics, using the starting and and then 2 representatives of each
closing conversation group to practise a conversation
- T divides the whole class into 4 groups and Topic 2:
each group choose one of the topics and A:Hello, Lan.How are you?
discuss B: Fine, thanks.And you?
- Then 2 representatives will practise their A:Well.What did you do last night ?
conversation B:I watched a football match on TV.
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page15 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
-the weather A:It is interesting.I love it.
-last night’s TV programmes B:Oh, really? I wish I could see it
- football A:See you later.
- plan for next weekend

IV-Consolidation:-How to start and end a conversation


-Retell the expressions about starting and ending a conversation

V-Homework -Make a conversation about one of the topics that you have learnt
- Prepare Unit 2 lesson 3 LISTENING

TUẦN 3 Unit 2. SCHOOL TALKS Ngày


Period:9 soạn :...../..../2009
Ngày
C.LISTENING
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of this lesson students will be able to listen to mini conversations for
specific information.

II. TEACHING AIDS: Text book, cassette player


III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking Ss to present what they like or dislike doing at school.
3- New lesson: Lesson 3:LISTENING
T Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

WARMER:Make questions for these Work in pairs


sentences Expected answer:
1.I’m taking English. 1.What are you taking this
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page16 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
2.I really like it semester?
3.For two weeks. 2.Do you like watching football?
4.No,I’m travelling alone travelling ?
5.That’s great. 3.How long are you staying there?
-T goes around the class and encourges 4.Are you travelling with your
them to make a lot questions parents ?
-T calls some Ss to read their answers 5.Would you like to go
- T introduces the new- lesson somewhere for a drink?
PRE- LISTENING
Activity 1:Matching
-T asks Ss to work in pairs and match a
question in A with a response in B -Work in pairs
- T calls on some pairs to read aloud the - Expected answer:
qustion and response in front of the class. 1C 4B
-Feedback and give correct answers 2E 5D
Activity 2:Describing pictures 3A
-Keep Ss to work in pairs and ask them to
ask and answer about pictures.T may also -Work in pairs beforelistening the
directly ask Ss tape.
Suggested questions:
1.What do you see in the pictures?
2.Who are they ?
3.What are thay doing?
4.Can you guess what are they taking
about ?
-Make sure Ss see all the details of the
pictures clearly before playing the tape.
WHILE-LISTENING:
TASK 1: Matching
-T asks Ss to listen to the conversations
and match them with the pictures. Work individually after listening
-Play the tape more than once if necessary. the tape.
- Tell Ss to listen for main ideas and key -Expected answer:
words Conversation 1:Picture b
- Call on some Ss to explain their answers Conversation 2:Picture c
to class. Conversation 3:Picture d
-Feedback and give correct answers Conversation 4:Picture a
TASK 2:Answering questions -Work individually and answer
-Have Ss to listen to the tape again and questions
answer the questions Expected answer:
-Let Ss listen the tape once and have a 1.She takes English
pause between conversations to make it 2.She is in Miss Lan Phuong’s
easied for Ss while they are doing the task. class.
- T calls on some ss to read aloud their 3.He is at a party.
answers in front of class. 4.He stays there for a week.
TASK3:Conversation Completion 5.No, she doesn’t .She travels
-T asks Ss to work in pairs and study the alone.
conversation.
-Encourage them to guess the missing
words. - Work in pairs after listening the
- Play the last co0nversation again. last time.
-Ask Ss to listen and complete the -Expected answer:
conversation by filling in the missing 1.it here
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page17 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
information. 4.comfortable
-Comment on Ss’s performance and give 2.very nice 5.travelling
correct answers. 3.big 6.No
POST-LISTENING 7.alone 8.for a drink
-T asks Ss to work in groups of 4 and
discuss the problems they have -Work in groups of 4 and discuss
experienced at school. about four topics.
-Suggested problems:
* What problems have you experienced at
school?
* difficulties in learning
* having bad marks
* being late for school

IV-Consolidation:-Retell about problems that you have experienced at school


V-Homework -Make a conversation about one of the topics that you have learnt
- Prepare Unit 2 lesson4 WRITING

TUẦN 4 Unit 2 SCHOOL TALKS Ngày


Period:10 soạn :...../...../2009
Ngày
D. WRITING
I.OBJECTIVE:
I-Knowledge: Helping students to fill a form.
II-Skill : Writing skill
II.TEACHING AIDS: text book, teacher’s book,some kinds of form
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking Ss to speak some difficult problems at school.
3- New lesson: Lesson 4:WRITING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
WARMER:Questions & answer The whole class
-T supplies for students some kinds Expected answer:
of forms and asks 1.They are forms
1.What are they? 2.to apply for a job
2.Have you ever filled in a form? To open accounts
When? To send or receive money at the post
3.What sort of imformation do you office
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page18 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
often have to provide when you fill To attend to a club
in a form? To change school ..etc..
3.Firstname,surname,address,age,
occupation, maritalstatus, telephone
number, reason...
PRE-WRITING
Activity 1:Present vocabulary
+ country of origin: queâ quaùn
+ Present address:ñòa chæ hieän
taïi
+ Marital status:tình traïng hoân
nhaân
+ Block capital: chöõ vieát hoa
+ Applicable:thích hôïp
-T asks Ss to read the newwords -Pair - work and then the whole class.
loudly -Expected answer:
Activity 2:Matching 1-D 5-B
-T asks Ss to do TASK2 .Match a line 2-F 6-C
in A with a question in B 3-E 7-A
-Have Ss compare their answers 4-G
with a partner .
-T can explain: Forms do not usually
ask questions, but they ask for
information
-Call on Ss to read their answers Work individually
-Tchecks and give correct answers -Some Ss speak and explain their ieads
PRACTICE for this form in front of class
TASK 3: Doing what Forms ask
-Have Ss do the task individually
-Go around the class and provide
help if necessary.
-Further explain and translate into -Work individually. And then compare
VietNamese if necessary their answers with a partner.
TASK 4: Filling in a form
-T asks Ss to study the form
carefully and fill the form using their Work individually and write down their
own information. writings on the blackboard
-Call 2 students to fill the form on
the blackboard while others doing
the task in the textbook.
- Let them have 4 minutes and then
tell Ss to look at the board and
comment on their performance.
-Correct the form as the whole class.
PRODUCTION
-Write a form to apply for a job /
attend a club.
-Let Ss write in 3 minutes and T
goes around to help if necessary.
-Peer correction
-T collects five Ss to correct and give
them marks.

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page19 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10

IV-Consolidation:-How to write a form ?


- What sort of information do you often write?

V-Homework - Complete your writing by T’s requirement.


- Prepare Unit 2 lesson 5 LANGUAGE FOCUS

TUẦN 4 Unit 2. SCHOOL TALKS Ngày


Period:11 soạn :...../...../2009
E . LANGUAGE FOCUS Ngày dạy : :...../.../2009
I.OBJECTIVE:
By the end of the lesson students will be able to:
-pronounce the sounds /^/ and /a:/ correctly
- Using regund and to – infinitive appropriately

II.TEACHING AIDS: text book, cassette player


III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2.Checking: Asking 2 Ss to retell sortb of information of a form
3- New lesson: Lesson 5:LANGUAGE FOCUS
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
Warmer : Jumpled letter
-T asks Ss to work in group of six and Work in group of six
rearrange the jumpled letter to make Each group which finishes the task first
a meaningful word. with the most correct words will be
1. bsutcej------------subject winner.
2.skat ------------task
3.imeeaf ------------female
4.ctarfif ------------traffic
5.evlo ------------ love
6.tearfh ------------father

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page20 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
PRONOUNCIATION
1.Example: love father -Note: distinguish two sounds
/^/ /a:/ /^/ /a:/
-T helps Ss to distinguish two sounds -o:wonderful, son,
-Ask them to listen and repeat -a+r:farm,far,alarm
2.Practice: month, some,something
-Open their textbooks and practise the start,star,hard..
sentences -u:bus,fun,husband, -a+p,b,d or ck
-Calls on some Ss to pronounce two cut,duck,button
sounds habit,establish,log
- Peer correction -oo: blood,flood rapid,pocket
-ou:country,couple,young - au: laugh,aunt
,enough,trouble,touch
GRAMMAR AND VOCABULARY -oe: does
I-Revise the form how to make -a:was
questions
1.Example:Make questions for these
responses -The whole calssand make questions for
* Yes, I am tired. responses
* I like listening to pop music -Are you tired today?
*Yes,I have got. -What kinds of music do you like?
* I learn English to get a good job. -Do you have you got many subjects
-T asks: What do you call theses today ?
questions ? Why do you learn English?
Yes-No question
Wh -question
2.Form:WH-word+auxiliary
V/be+S+V ? Listen to T’s eliciting and takes notes
3.Exercise 1:Make question for the Work individually
following responses
II-Distinguish the infinitive and Listen to T’s eliciting and takes notes
gerund Work individually and supply the correct
1.The verbs can only be followed by form of verbs
to-infinitive Expected answer:
Agree decide plan Exercise1:
Refuse hope expect 1.to hear 2.going
Manage seem tend 3.remembering
Fail pretend want 4.doing 5.worring 6.to pay
2.The verbs can only be followed by 7.to go 8.visiting 9.seeing
gerund 10.hearing
Enjoy consider practise Exercise 2:
Avoid miss 1.to go 2.waiting 3.having
postpone 4.find 5.living 6.making
Mind risk like 7.to call 8.to lend 9.talking
3.The to -infinitive and -ing never 10.to post
mean the same when we use after
theses verbs:
Remember Stop Forget
Regret try mean
4.The to-inf and V-ing has the same
meaning after some verbs
Begin start like
dislike
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page21 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
Love
4.Exercise 2,3:Supply the correct form
of verbs in the parenthese
-T asks Ss to work individually and the
compare their answers with a friend
- Call on some Ss to read their
answers in front of class.
- Feedback and give correct answers:

IV-Consolidation:-Practise the sounds /^/and /a:/


-Make wh-question
-Use the infinitive and gerund of verb
V-Homework - Do all exercises 1,2,3 4,5,in Workbook.
- Prepare Unit 3 lesson 2 READING

TUẦN 4 Unit 3 PEOPLE’S BACKGROUNDNgày


Period:12 soạn :...../..../2009
A.READING Ngày
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to improve such micro reading skills as
skimming for general ideas and sanning for specificvspecificv
information
II.TEACHING AIDS: text book, teacher’s book
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking:
3- New lesson: Lesson 1:READING
T Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
3’ WARMER: Matching Work in group of six and match the
Name Job name of famous people and their
1.Mr Nam a.scientist jobs
2.Tra Giang b.teacher
3.Quang Dung c.writer Brainstorming: Marie Curie
4.Marie Curie d.actor
5.Nam Cao e.singer
PRE-READING
Activity 1 Answering questions
1.Have you ever heard of Marie Curie? -The whole class answer T’questions
2.What do you know about her ? -Expected answer:
6’ * Marie Curie - scientist - famous 1.Marie Curie is a famous scientist

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page22 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
-physicist -cancer -Nobel. 2.She is a physicist
Activity 2:Presenting Vocabulary 3.Cancer made her become famous
-T helps Ss to explain some newwords and was the first person who found
and phrases radium
+general education(n):giaùo duïc 4.She was awarded a Nobel Prize in
phoå thoâng Chemistry
+brilliant(a):clever, quick at learning
7’ + private tutor (n):gia sư -Work individually
+ to interrupt(v) giaùn ñoaïn -Speak them in chorus and takes
+PhD:Doctor of Phylosophy:tieán só notes
+tragic death: die painfully: caùi cheát
ñau khoå
+to be awarded: ñöôïc trao giaûi
+atomic weight of radium:troïng
löôïng nguyeân töû
+humanitarian wish : mong muoán
nhaân ñaïo
WHILE-READING
Task 1:Matching
-T asks Ss to read the passage
individually and match the words or Work individually
phrases in A with their meaning in B. Expected answer:
-Encourage them to try to guess the 1.c 2.e
meanings of the words in the context 3.a 4.d 5.b
of the reading.
- Call on some Ss to read and explain
their answers aloud in front of the
class.
- Feedback and give correct answers:
TASK 2:TRUE or FALSE
-Have Ss read the passage more Individual work
carefully and decide whether the Expected answer:
statements are true (T) or 1.T
false(F).Correct the false information. 2F (Her dream was to become a
-T asks Ss to highlight or underline the scientist)
information in the passage thet helps 3T
Ss find the correct answers. 4F (She married Pierre Curie in 1895)
-Feedback and give correct answers: 5T
TASK 3:Answering questions:
-T asks Ss to do the task in pairs to -Work in pairs
answer the qustions. -Expected answer:
-Tell Ss to compare their naswers with 1.MC was born in Warsaw on
other pairs. Let them discuss and November 7, 1867.
correct for one another. 2.She was a brilliant and mature
-Feedback and give correct answers: student.
3.She worked as a private tubor to
save money for a study tour abroad.
4.She was awardes a Nobel Prize in
Chemistry for determining the atomic
weight of radium.
POST-READING 5.No, it wasn’t. Her real joy was “
Work in groups: Retell the easing human suffering”
background of MC, using these
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page23 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
questions: Work in groups, then role play
1.Where was she born? when?
2.Why did she become so famous ?
3.What made her become famous ?
4.Who was her husband ?
5.When did she found radium?
6.When did she die?

IV-Consolidation:-Retell the background about Marie Curie


V-Homework - Write a short passage about 100 words about Marie C
- Prepare Unit 3 lesson 2 SPEAKING

TUẦN 5 Unit 3 PEOPLE’S BACKGROUND


Ngày
Period:13 soạn :...../09/2009
B. SPEAKING Ngày

I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to :- talk about someone’s background
II.TEACHING AIDS: text book,
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking a student to retell some information about Marie
Curie
3- New lesson: Lesson 2:SPEAKING

T Teacher’s activities Students’ activities


WARMER: Jumpled Words
-T asks Ss to arrange jumpled words to -The whole class
make a meaningful sentences Expected answer:
1.born,Marie Curie, November 1.Marie Curie was born in Warsaw
7th,Warsaw, in was ,on,1867. on November 7th,1867
2.become,she,to,dream,her,was,a 2.She wanted to become a famous
famous,scientist. scientist.
3.a PhD,receive,the 3.She was the first woman to
first,to,Marie,became,from,woman,from receive a PhD from the Sorbonne.
,the Sorbonne.
-Tasks :Where can we get information
of one famous person?
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page24 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
->in books, magazines, newspapers,
from an interview.
Now we practise the concluding of an
interview.
PRESENTATION
TASK 1:Expliciting the term -Listen to T and answer t’s question
-T asks Ss to work in pairs and decide Work in pairs
which items can tell somebody’s Give correct qustions for each item
background. • Family
-Encourage Ss to discuss the items and +How many people are there in
choose the appropriate ones. your family?
• Family +What does your father do?
• Education • Education
• Experience +Where did you study at high
-Ask Ss to discuss the questions that school ?
can be used +What subjects do you like best?
to get information for each item. +What degree do you have?
• Experience
+How long have you worked as a
doctor/ teacher.......?
+What experience do you have?
PRACTICE: -Ss listen to T’s requirements
TASK 2:Set the scene and give some questions for
-Imagine you are a journalist.Use the each item.
cues below to interview a classmate + birth of date:what’s your
about his/her background or that of a birthday?/when were you born?
person he/ she knows well +place of birth:where were you
Note: Before carrying out the interview, born?
Ss should study the items of +parents:What does your
information carefully and find the father/mother do?
questions for each item. +bothers: how many
-Then Ask Ss to carry out the interview brothers/sisters do you have?what
in pairs. do they do?How old are they?
-Make sure that all Ss have the form +primary school:which primary
filled before moving to the next activity. school/secondary school did you go
to?
+Subjects:What’s your favourite
subject?
-Ss can begin :
The person I interview ic Lan.She
PRODUCTION was born in 1991 in Hanoi.There
TASK 3: Report an interview are five members in her
-T asks Ss to work in groups and talk family..........
about the person they have known
through the interview.
-Call on some Ss to give a small talk in
front of the class.
-Comment on Ss’s performance and
make necessary corrections.

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page25 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
IV-Consolidation:-How to get information from a person through an interview.
V-Homework - Write a short passage about information of a person that you
have interviewed
- Prepare Unit 3 lesson 3 LISTENING

TUẦN 5 Unit 3 PEOPLE’S BACKGROUND Ngày


Period:14 soạn :...../09/2009
Ngày
C.LISTENING

I.OBJECTIVES:
After this lesson Ss will be able to improve listening skills as listening for specific
information about Olympic Champion
II.TEACHING AIDS: : text book, tapescript, cassette player
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking 2 students to make an interview about
background
3- New lesson: Lesson 3:LISTENING

T Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

WARMER:Answering Questions
-T gives a picture about Olympic The whole class answer T’s
Champions and asks Ss to work in pairs questions
and talk about them.
Suggest the questions:
+What do you know about Olympic ?
( When did the Olympic start ? How often
is it held ?)
+ Do you know any Olympic Champions ?
+Can you name any Olympic
Champions? Listen to T’s eliciting and copy
+ What would you like to know about down
these people?
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page26 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10

PRE- LISTENING
Activity 1:Presenting Vocabulary
+Olympic Champion
+ sports teacher: a teacher who teaches
sports Listen and repear these words
+ Diploma(n) chứng nhận,văn bằng
+ romantic (adj) -Work individually
+ Degree:bằng cấp -Read all statements and guess
+ Certificate:giấy chứng nhận them
Activity 2:Listening and repeating

WHILE -LISTENING
TASK 1:TRUE Or FALSE
-T asks Ss to to listen to the conversation Listen to tape and give answers
between Bob and Sally. Decide whether -Expected answer:
the statements are true or false. 1.T
-Before listening to the tape, T asks Ss to 2T
read all statements and understand 3F( I don’t have much free
clearly. time)
- Encourage Ss to guess the statements if 4T
they are T or F 5F( I want to be a sports
-Play the tape several times if necessary teacher)
-Have Ss compare their answer with a
friend
-Call on some Ss to explain their answers
in front of the class.
-Feedback and give correct answers:

TASK 2:GAP- FILLING


-Tell Ss to read the sentences carefully -Work individually and then
and try to guess the missing words in the compare their answers with a
blanks. partner.
- Ask Ss to listen to the conversation
again and fill the blanks. -Expected answer:
- Play the tape once 1.general aducation
- Feedback and give correct answers: 2.lives - family
3.different - swimming
4.loves stories
5.teacher’s diploma.

POST-LISTENING
Ask Ss to work in pairs :Ask and answer
about Sally
Suggested questions: -Work in pairs
1.Who is sally?
2.When was She born? -Role- play :Ask and Answer about
3.What has she got at local school? Sally.
4.What did she do when she was 15?
5.Where is her house?
6.How many members are there in her
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page27 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
family ?
who are they?
7.What does she like in her family?

IV-Consolidation:- Report something what you have listened about Sally

V-Homework - Write a short passage about Sally


- Prepare Unit 3 lesson 4 WRITING

TUẦN 5 Unit 3 PEOPLE’S BACKGROUND Ngày


Period:15 soạn :...../09/2009
D.WRITING Ngày
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to write a CV about people’s background.
II.TEACHING AIDS: text book, chalks
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking 2 students to make an interview about Sally’s
background
3- New lesson: Lesson 4:WRITING
T Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
WARMER:Matching Work in groups and match the
-T asks Ss to close their textbook and items in A with their information
match the items in A with the information in B
in B

A B Expected answer:
1.Name a.Boston 1e
2.Date of birth b.Kengsinton 2f
3.Place of birth Highschool 3a
4.School attended c.English, 4b
5.Exams passed Maths,French 5c
6.Previous jobs d.Tourist guide 6d

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page28 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
7.Interests e.David Brown 7g
f.12/11/86
g.Music and
dancing
-T checks and asks Ss where these
information are listed.
Someboby’s background
PRESENTATION:
TASK 1:How to write somebody’s
background
-T explains the elements of a C.V by asking
Ss to read Mr Brown’s C.V
C.V:cirriculum vitae -a form with details
about somebody’s past education and jobs:
lí lòch
C.V normally consists of following items Give correct answer:
Personal information/data: Mr Brown was born on 12th November,
1969 in Boston.He went to Kengsinton
Education:
High school and passed exams in
Previous jobs: English, French, and Mathematics.He
Interests: worked in a travel agency from June
-T asks Ss to work independently and write 1991 to December 1998. And from 1999
a paragraph about Mr Brown, using the to 2002, he worked as a hotel
telephonist. He likes music and dancing.
cues below.
Be born............like...........go
to.....school.........from .........to.........pass
exams in......travel agency.......work as. Work in pairs
-Have Ss compare their wrting with a - Complete the information in a
friend. form
PRACTICE: - Go to the blackboard and write
TASK 2: them
-T asks Ss to work in pairs and ask the
partner for the information about his/her Name Mr/Ms
parents and complete the form. Date of birth
-Go around the class and provide help by Place of birth
giving suggested Qs Education:
*Education: which school did you go to ? School
when? attended
* Exams: which exams did you pass? Exams
When? passed:
*Hobby: what’s your hobby ? what do you Previous Date from/
do in your free time? job: date to
* Sports:Do you like play sports? What
sports do you like playing?
* Job: What did you work ? when?
- Call 2 students to go the blackboard and
write their writing
-Peer correction
PRODUCTION:
TASK 3 Work individually
Write a paragraph about your partner’s
parents. Then ask him/her to read the
paragraph and check whether the
information is correct.
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page29 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10

IV-Consolidation:- Write about somebody’s background


what sort of information to write?

V-Homework : - Complete your writing


- Prepare Unit 3 lesson 5 LANGUAGE FOCUS.

TUẦN 6 Unit 3 PEOPLE’S BACKGROUND Ngày


Period:16 soạn :...../09/2009
Ngày
E.LANGUAGE FOCUS
I.OBJECTIVES:
After this lesson Ss will be able to:- distinguishing the sounds /e/ and /„/ ,
Using the past perfect tense correctly
II.TEACHING AIDS: text book, cassette player
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking Ss to read a paragraph about sb’s background
3- New lesson: Lesson 5:LANGUAGE FOCUS
T Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
WARMER:Table completion
-Ask Ss to work in groups and give each -Work in groups
group a table containing 10 verbs -The group which completes the

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page30 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
-Tell Ss to complete the table following table first and has more correct
the instruction verbs will be winner.
Verb Past Past
infinitive form participle
take
met
Left
come
broke
PRONOUNCIATION /e/ and /„/ Listen to T’s explanation
1.Example: pen hat -Take notes
/e/ /„/ + /e/ -> e:pen bell,tell,went,
-T helps Ss to distinguish two sounds expensive,
-Ask them to listen and repeat better,seven,depend,telephone.
2.Practice: -> a:many, any,anyone,said
-Open their textbooks and practise the +/„ / ->a:hat,bank, family
sentences ,example ,
-Calls on some Ss to pronounce two happen,natural,fat,camera
sounds
- Peer correction
GRAMMAR AND VOCABULARY
Review the past perfect tense
1 Form:
+ affirmative:S + had + PP
+ negative: S + had + not + PP
+ question: Had + S + PP ?
2.Use:
The past perfect tense can be used to describe :
* an action before a point of time in the past:
EX:I had done all my homework before 7 p.m
last night
* An action that had happened before another
past action:
EX:I had done all my homework before I watched
TV.
3.Adv: BY + time
Before, after, when,as soon as + Work individually and the
clause compare their answer with a
PRACTICE: friend
Exercise 1:Use the verbs in brackets Expected answer:
in the past perfect. 1.had broken 6.had
-Note that the action in the past perfect been
is always before another past action 2.had done 7.had left
-Have Ss compare their answers with a 3.had met 8.had
friend. moved
-Make sure all the verbs have been put 4.hadn’t turned 9.hadn’t
the correct form. seen
- Call on some Ss to read aloud their 5.had ever seen 10.had
answers in front of the class. broken in
-Feedback and give correct answers:
Exercise 2: Put the verbs in
brackets in the past simple or the -Work individually and then
past perfect. compare the answers with a
-Tell Ss to do the exercise carefully and friend .

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page31 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
then compare the answers with a friend. -Expected answer:
-Feedback and give correct answers: 1.had just finished /came
2.had seldom travelled/went
3.went/had already taken
4.Did you manage/ had he gone
Exercise 3:Correcting mistakes 5.had just got/ phoned /had
-T asks Ss to read the story carefully and been
ask them some questions about the -Work in pairs and then compare
story to make sure Ss have general the answers with another pairs
understanding Expected answer:
+ What is the story about ? Sentence 1:had climbed ->
+ Who are in the story ?.............. climbed
-Have Ss work in pairs and find five 3:had turned
mistakes in the use of tenses in the ->turned
story. 5:had called ->
- Ask Ss to join another pair to make a called
group and compare and discuss the 7:had heard ->
answers. heard
- Call on some Ss to explain their 9:went -> had
answers in front of the class. already gone
- Feedback and give correct answers:

IV-Consolidation:- Retell all grammatical points that you have


learnt
V-Homework - Complete these sentences
1.He had already known her before....................
2.When he came back,...................
3.No sooner had she come back...................
4.I didn’t know what...................
5.He thanked me for what I.........

TUẦN 6 Ngày
Period:17 TEST YOURSELF A soạn :...../10/2009
Ngày
I.OBJECTIVES:
Helping students to test yourknledge from unit 1 to 3
II.TEACHING AIDS: Text book ,
II.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking 2 students to give the correct form of verbs
3- New lesson: TEST YOURSELF A

T Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page32 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10

WARMER:Answering questions The whole class


-T asks Ss to answer the questions
1.What have you learnt about grammar
and topic:you and me?
2.What are they?
-Work individually and compare
PRESENTATION: their answers with a friend.
I-LISTENING:Completing the table -Expected answer:
-T asks Ss to look through the 1.15th,January1929
information of a famous person and 2.in 1951
guess what words are suitable to 3.for 4 years
complete. 4.he met
-T can help Ss by asking some 5.they got marrired
questions and explains newwords 6.a minister at
+ fall in love:yeâu, phaûi loøng 7.the black freedom
+ get married: keát hoân movement
+the black freedom movement:phong 8.heard his speech at the
traøo töï do cuûa ngöôøi da ñen 9.in 1964
-T plays the tape twice and calls some 10.4,April 1968
Ss to give answers
-Feedback and give correct answers:
-Work in groups

II-READING: Reading the passage and


completing the blanks
-T asks Ss to read the passage and -Expected answer:
choose one appropriate phrse in the 1.F
box for each blanks .Note there are 2.C
more phrases than needed. 3.A
-First, Ask Ss to work in group and 4.D
discuss what kinds of phrase are
suitable to complete in each blank.
-T goes around the class and
encourages help if necessary.
-T explains some newwords:
+to be married with: laäp gia ñình
+ to do research:nghieân cöùu
+ principal: hieäu tröôûng
+ technical college: tröôøng cao ñaúng
kó thuaät
+ Public Health Council:Hoäi ñoàng
söùc khoeû coâng coäng
-T calls some Ss to give answers
-Work in pairs
III-GRAMMAR:Using the correct form -Expected answer:
of the verbs in brackets to complete 1.to apply 7.reading
the letter of application: 2.am 8.know
-T can explain the part of speech of 3.attended 9.am able
word in each blank and ask Ss to work 4.passed 10.hearing
in pair 5.got
-T calls some Ss to give answers in 6.can
front of the class.
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page33 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
-Feedback and give correct answers:

IV-WRITING:Writing a letter of reply


-T guides Ss to retell how to write a
letter of reply.
( how many parts, form,content.........)
-T asks Ss to to work individually and
peer correction
- T calls 2 Ss to go to the blackboard
and write down your writing .
- T checks and corrects their mistakes

IV-Consolidation:- What you have learnt in Unit 1,2 and 3


V-Homework - Review all grammtical points and vocabulary.
- Prepare ONE PERIOD TEST 1.

TUẦN 7 LESSON PLAN Ngày


soạn :...../10/2009
Period 20th ***
*** Ngày
A.OBJECTIVE:
I-Knowledge: Helping students to correct ONE PERIOD TEST 1
II-Skill : Reading,speaking,listening and writing skill
B.PROCEDUCE:
I-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
II-Checking: Sharing papers with Students
III- New lesson: Correcting ONE PERIOD TEST 1
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page34 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
De -1 De-2
I-Pronunciation : (1m) I-Pronunciation : (1m)
1.C 1.A
2.B 2.D
3.C 3.A
4.A 4.D
II-Multiple choice (2ms) II-Multiple choice (2ms)
1.C 1.C
2.B 2.A
3.C 3.D
4.B 4.C
5.C 5.A
6.C 6.D
7.B 7.D
8.D 8.A
III-Mistake corrections III-Mistake corrections
1.C-reading 1.C-has
2.C- where 2.B-became
3.A-usually have 3.B-from
4.A -had finished 4.C-locking
IV-Writing(2ms) 5.B-to change
1.What did you do yesterday? IV-Writing(2ms)
2.They never do to school on Sundays 1.Before she became a teacher, she
3.He doesn’t enjoy playing sports in his had worked as a private tutor.
free time 2.Father usually plays tennins at
4.She had spent her youth in France weekends.
before she moved in USA 3.How many children do you have?
V-READING:(2ms) Gap -filling 4.Mr Brown bought a car two years
1.born age
2.rich V-READING:(2ms) Gap -filling
3.in 1.born
4.who 2.rich
5.death 3.in
6.impotant 4.who
7.from 5.death
8.won 6.impotant
VI-Listening(2ms) 7.from
1.born 8.won
2.from VI-Listening(2ms)
3.New York 1.born
4.single/computer 2.from
5.works 3.New York
6.tennis 4.single/computer
7.In 5.works
6.tennis
7.In

IV-Consolidation:- What have you learnt inUnit 1,2 and 3


V-Homework - Review all grammtical points and vocabularies.
- Prepare Unit 4 lesson 1: READING

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page35 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10

TUẦN 7 UNIT4: SPECIAL EDUCATION Ngày


Period: 21st soạn :...../10/2009
A.READING Ngày

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to develop such micro reading skills as
scanning for specific information and guessing meaning in
context
II.TEACHING AIDS: Text book, pictures
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking:
3- New lesson: lesson 1:READING
STAGES TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’
ACTIVITIES

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page36 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
1/ WARM UP WARMER:Brainstorming”disabled -Work in group and
” discuss about
-T asks Ss to work in groups and make disabled.
a list of the people that are related to -Ss are encouraged
disabled to give a lot of words
mentally deaf lisp(nãi that are related to
ngäng) the topic.
retarded

Disabled

2/ BEFOR YOU READ


Dumb blind
PRE-READING: -Work individually
Activity1:Look at the Braille Alphebat and then compare
.Then work out the message that with a friend
follows.(textbook) -Work in groups of
Activity2:Close your textbooks and six, Stick (v) into the
asks Ss to look at activities .Which column that disabled
ones do you think would be difficult people can’t do.
for blind, deaf and mute children.
Activities Deaf Mute Blind
Listen to V
teacher
Pronounce
words
Raise arms
Close/open
fingers -Listen to T’s
Phone friends eliciting and copy
Look at down
blackboard
Activity3: Vocabulary:
+dumb(adj) not being able to speak
+proper schooling(n):enough and
good study (học hành đầy đủ)
3/ WHILE-READING +opposïition(n) : sự đối lập -> to
oppose(v)to
+to try one’s best =to make effort(v) -Work individually
+to be proup of(adj)=take pride on Expected answer:
: 1.C
TASK 1:Matching 2.E
-T asks Ss to read the paasage 2.A
individually and to do Task 1.The 4.B
words in A appear in the reading 5.D
passage.Match them with their
definition in B.
- T encourages Ss to guess the
meaniong of the words in the context. -Work individually
- Tell Ss to compare their answers Expected answer:
with a friend. 1.D
2.B
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page37 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
- Call some Ss to read their answers 3.A
aloud in front of the class. 4.C
-Feedback and give correct answers: 5.D
TASK 2:Multiple choice
-Tell Ss to read the passage again
more carefully and complete the -Work in pairs.
4/ POST -READING sentences by circling the -Expected answer:
corresponding letter A,B,C or D 1.disabled
-Ask Ss to explanation for their choice. 6.time-consuming
-Feedback and give correct answers: 2.read
-Call on some Ss to read the passage 7.Maths
aloud in front of the calss. 3.write
1.Summary the text 8.arms
-T asks Ss to work in pair and read the 4.efforts
summary of the passage carefully. 9.fingers
-Encourage Ss to guess the missing 5.opposition
words. 10.proud
-Have Ss complete the summary in -Work individually
pairs. -Ss are encouraged
to give a lot .of
different ideas.
2.Answer question
* What would happen to the disabled
children if a special class wasnot
organized for them.
IV-Consolidation:- Call 2 Ss to read the text aloud in front
of class.
V-Homework - Learnt newwords by heart
- Prepare Lesson 2:SPEAKING.

TUẦN 8 UNIT 4 SPECIAL EDUCATION


Period:22 nd Ngày
B. SPEAKING soạn :...../10/2009
Ngày
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson Ss will beable to talk about school life
II. TEACHING AIDS: Text book,
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking 2 Ss to read the text and answer T’s Question
3- New lesson: lesson 2:SPEAKING
STAGES TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’
ACTIVITIES

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page38 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
1/ WARM UP WARMER:Matching:
-Work in group and
A B match the words in
1.Maths a.Plants and A with their
2.Physics animals expressions in B
3.History b.gymnatics
4.Geography c.25x2+3x+10=0
5.Physical d.E=mc2
education e.H20
6.English f.the countries of
7.Chemistry the words.
8.Biology g.the 2nd World War
9.Information h.computers and
Technology their applications
i.reading,writing -The whole class
and spelling answer questions
-T asks Ss to give feedback and
answer T’s questions.
1.What are your favourite subject?
2.Which one don’t you like ?
3.How much time do you prepare for -Work individually
2/ PRESENTATION your lesson everyday? -Expected answer:
PRESENTATION A.4 B.1
TASK 1:Study the conversation C.2
-Have Ss study the questions in the D.6 E.3
interview carefully. F.5 G.7
-Ask Ss to work individually and fill in
the blanks with the right questions.
-GiveSs tips by asking them to r5ead
the answers before deciding the best
question in the blanks.
-Give correct answer
3/ PRACTICE: -Work in pairs

TASK2: Make an interview


-T asks Ss to work in pairs and carry
out the interview, using the questions
in task 1.
Note:Ss are suggested to use his/ her
own information to answer the
questions. However , they may use the
answer in the book as samples:
Hanh went to Long Bien Lower-
secondary school.She had 10 subjects
to learn at scholl. She went to school Work individually
in the morning and often had 5 classes -Ss imitate the
4/ PRODUCTION: each morning. example in
-Go around the class and provide help textbook
when necessary. Ss report the
TASK3: Report the interview information of your
-Tell your class about what you know partner.
about your partner.
-Call on some Ss to use the
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page39 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
information in the interview to make a
mini-presentation about his/ her
partner.
-Tell the whole class to comment on
presenter’s preformance.
-Make necessary corrections.

IV-Consolidation:- Ask and answer about activities at school.


- Report about your work and your partner.
V-Homework - Write a short paragraph about 50 words about your
studying
at school
- Prepare Lesson 3:LISTENING

TUẦN 8 UNIT 4 SPECIAL EDUCATION


Ngày
Period:23rd C.LISTENING soạn :...../10/2009
Ngày
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to develop such micro listening skills as
listening for specific information about a special class for
disabled children.
II. TEACHING AIDS:Text book, Cassette player
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking 2 Ss to play a conversation about activities at their school
3- New lesson: lesson 3:LISTENING
STAGES TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’
ACTIVITIES

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page40 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
1/ WARM UP WARMER:Word form
-T asks Ss to work in groups of -Work in group and the
three to four and find the different group with the longest
words that derive from the list of correct words will
following roots: be the winner.
Sorry: -Expected answer:
Second: Sorry -sorrow-
Decide: sorrily.......
2/ BEFORE LISTENING Able: Second-secondary-
PRE-LISTENING: secondly-secondhand.
Activity1:Explain the Decide-decision-
newwords in the box decisive-decisively......
+photograph(n):a picture or Able-disabled-
imagine taken by disability......
photographers: -The whole class and
+photographer(n):a person who listen to T’s eliciting
takes pictures -Pronounce all words in
+photography(n):nhiếp ảnh chorus.
+photogenic(adj):ăn ảnh
+photographic(adj):belong to
photography
-T asks Ss to work in pairs and fill
each of the blanks with one word -Work in pairs
from the box. -Expected answer:
-Call on some Ss to read the 1.photographic
answers aloud in front of the 2.photography
class. 3.photographer
-Feedback and give correct 4.photograph
answers: 5.photogenic
Activity2:Vocabulary
-T explains the following words -Listen to T’s eliciting
that will appear in the recording . and copy the meaning
+surroundings(n) conditions, of these words
objects that make the living -Repeat after T in
environment:mäi træåìng xung chorus.
quanh
+ sorrow(n) pain or distress
3/ WHILE-LISTENING: caused by loss or disability:nçi
buån
+passion(n) great love for
something: niÒm ®am mª
+exhibition(n):a display, a public -Work individually and
showing then compare their
-Listen and repeat them. answers with a friend.
-Expected answer:
TASK1:True or false 1.T
-T asks Ss to read the statements 2. F(Information not
carefully. given)
-Encourage Ss to guess whether 3. T
the statements are true or false. 4.F (The subjects of
-Play the tape three times and their photos about
then tell Ss to compare their people and scenery)
answers with a friend. 5.T
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page41 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
-Check the answers as the whole -Work individually
class. -Expected answer:
1.photographic
6.simple
4/ POST-LISTENING TASK2:Gap-filling: 2.19
-T asks Ss to read a part of the 7.peaceful
talk carefully and have a guess of 3.exhibition
the missing words. 8.chickens
-Have Ss listen to the tape and 4.50
write in each blank with a suitable 9.stimulated
word. 5.beauty
-Call on some Ss to read the 10.escape.
asnwers aloud in front of the
class. -Listen to T’s questions
-Feedback and give correct and answer them.
answers: -The whole class.
Questions and answer:
-T asks Ss to answer the following
questions:
1.Who are the members of the
club ?
2.What are they doing in HaNoi?
3.How many photographs are on
display ?
4.What are their photos about ?
5.What does their passion of
taking photographys help them ?

IV-Consolidation:- Retell the information what you’ve listened about


Vang Trang
Khuyet’s Club.
V-Homework - Write a short paragraph about 50 words about this club.
- Prepare Lesson 4:WRITING

TUẦN :...8..... Unit 4 SPECIAL EDUCATION


Ngày
Period:24 th
D.WRITING soạn :...../10/2009
I.OBJECTIVES: Ngày
By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to write a letter of comlaint
II. TEACHING AIDS:
Text book
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking 2 Ss to give the correct form of words

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page42 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
1.My father is one of the most famous (photograph) in the
city.
2.I have been studying (photograph) for 5 years.
3.The beauty of (day) life has been captured by disabled
children.
4.The members of the club are the ( mental) retarded
children.
Answer: 1.photographers,2.photography,3 daily,4.mentally
3- New lesson: lesson 4:WRITING
STAGES TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’
ACTIVITIES
1/WAR WARMER:categorising Work in groups and put
M -T asks Ss to work in groups of four. Give ten or the given word into
more adjectives and ask Ss to put them under two right box
UP headings: compliments(khen ngîi) and complime complain
complaints(phµn nµn) nts ts
Bad, helpful, expensive, lazy, hard-working, good, Helpful Bad
careful, poor, unhappy, beautiful, clever,clear Hard- Expensiv
-Feedback and give correct answers: working e
-T gives definition and format of a letter of
complaint:
Complaint is a kind of formal letter used when you -Listen to T’s eliciting
are not happy with a service, a contract,a
course,...
A letter of complaint usually includes three main
parts:
+ Opening
2/ + Explaining the problem
BEFORE + Suggesting a resolution
WRITIN PRESENTATION:
G Activity1:Study the advertisement: -Work in groups
-T asks Ss to read advertisement and discuss.
Then complete in the box.
Advertised Reality
( promising things) (disappointed things)
Teachers Native teachers VietNamese teachers
Numbers No more than 20 More than 30
students students
Books and free Had to buy
cassetterpla /expensive
yer
Classrooms All air - conditioned No air -conditioned
-Take notes and copy
Classtime 3 hours< 5.30 - Only two
8.30> hours<6.00-8.00> down
-T can explain some difficult words:
+ native teachers:teachers who come from
English- speaking countries
+air -conditioned(adj) to be equipped/furnished -Work in pairs
with air-conditioners -Expected answer:
B.I’m definitely not happy
Activity2: Complete the dialogue in Task 1: with it at all
-T asks Ss to use the information in column to B.there are only few native
complete the dialogue. teachers, not all of them are
- Ask Ss to work in pair and then call some Ss to native ones.
practise aloud in front of class. B.in fact there are more than
30 students in my class.

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page43 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
-Feedback and give correct answers: B.I have to pay for them.
PRACTICE: B.the room is not air
conditioned .There is only
TASK2:Complete the letter of complaint one ceiling fan in my class
-Have Ss read the letter of complaint in the book room. It is very hot.
and complete it basing on the dialogue in task 1. B.in fact classes often start
-Ask Ss to use appropriate connectors to make the late and finish
writing smoother. early.Sometimes it starts 20
minutes late.
-Tell Ss to exchange their writing with a friend .
-Introduce peer correction.
3/ - Pick up some writing to check the mistakes as
AFTER the whole class. -Work individually
WRITI PRODUCTION:
NG -T gives a short passage and asks Ss to set out
and punctuate the following formal complaint
letter. Divide it into paragraphs if you think it is
necessary. -Work individually

IV-Consolidation:- How to write a letter complaint.


- How many parts are there in this kind of the letter?

V-Homework - Write a letter of complaint fully.


- Prepare Lesson 5:LANGUAGE FOCUS.

TUẦN :..9...... Unit 4 SPECIAL EDUCATION Ngày


Period:25 th
E. LANGUAGE FOCUS soạn :...../10/2009
Ngày
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to distinguish the sounds /ɔ:/ and/
ɔ/
Using The+ adjective, used to+infinitive and which
II. TEACHNG AIDS:
Text book, cassette player
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking 2 Ss to complete these sentences:

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page44 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
1.Thank/your letter/inform/me/poor/service/center.
2.We /examine/the/situation/and/find/what/say/true.
3- New lesson: lesson 5:LANGUAGE FOCUS
STAGES TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
1/ WARM UP WARMER: Bingo -Ss work in groups of 4
bottle not dog and listen to T’s
sport stop corner pronounciation and write
mornin walk boss words that they listen
g clearly down on a small
box Shop more paper of each group .If
2/ PRESENTATION -T asks Ss to distinguish two any group has more six
sounds /ɔ:/ and/ ɔ / words,they will shout
PRONOUNCIATION:/ɔ:/ and/ɔ / “bingo”and become a
1.Example: bottle sport winner.
/ɔ/ /ɔ:/
-T helps Ss to distinguish two
sounds -Listen to T’s eliciting
*/ ɔ /:a short vowel andtake notes
*/ɔ:/ :a long vowel(o+r,l)
-Ask them to listen and repeat
2.Practice:
-Open their textbooks and practise
the sentences -Work individually and
3/ PRACTISING -Calls on some Ss to pronounce speak aloud
two sounds
- Peer correction
GRAMMAR:
1:The +adjective:
a.Example:The young have the -Listen to T’s eliciting
future in their hands. andtake notes
b.Use: to describe a group of
people as a whole
The young = young people
The blind, the rich ,the poor...... -Work individually
- These adjectives are followed by -Expected answer:
a plural verb. 1.the injured
c.Practice:Exercise1 2.the unemployed
-Ask Ss to work individually and 3.the sick
complete the sentences using the 4.the rich
+ one of the adjs in the book 5.the poor
-Have Ss compare their answers
with a friend. -Listen to T’s eliciting
-Call on some ss to read their andtake notes
completed sentences.
-Feedback and give correct
answers:
2.Revision of used to +
infinitive
a.Example:When I was a chyild, we -Work individually
used to go to school on foot. -Expected answer:
b.Use:to exprexx a past action and 1.used to have
state .It has no present equivelent. 2.used to live
3.used to eat
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page45 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
Note:the negative and question: 4.used to be
+What did you use to go on foot? 5.used to take
+ We didn’t use to do anything 6.used to be
interesting. 7.did you use to go
c.Practice:Exercise 2
-Ask Ss to do exercise 2.Complete
the sentences with Used to.........+
a suitable verb.
-Tell Ss to compare their answers -Work in pairs
with a friend.
-Check the answers as the whole
class.
-Give correct answer:
3.WHICH:as a connector
a.Example:
She arrived on time, which
amazed everyboby.
Sheila can’t speak English, which
is disadvantage .
b.Meaning:
c.Use:to replace a preceding
clause.
d.Practice:
-Ask Ss to work in pairs and do
exercise 3. Join a sentence from A
with one from B to make a new
sentence using which
-Call on some Ss to read their
sentences.
-Feedback and give correct
answers:
IV-Consolidation:- What have you learnt in this lesson?
V-Homework - Do exercise 1,2, 3 again
- Prepare UNIT 5:Lesson 1:READING

TUẦN 9 UNIT:5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU


Period:26th Ngày
soạn :...../10/2009
Ngày
A.READING
I.OBJECTIVES:
- By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to get information about
computers
II.TEACHING AIDS:
- Text book,computer, projector
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page46 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
2-Checking: Asking 2 Ss to combine these sentences
3- New lesson: lesson 1:READING
STAGES Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1/ WARM-UP A/Guessing game
-T gives Ss 4 facts ang asks Ss to guess -Ss guess what it is
what it is? =>It is a computer
+This is a machine that is used to do the
calculations.
+to play games
2/ PRE- +to watch a film
READING +to listen to music -Ss answer the
B/ Activity1:Answering questions questions
1.Do you have a computer? 3.- to get information
2.Do you know to use it? -to send or receive
3.What do people use it for? mail
-T asks Ss to work in groups -to type documents
Activity2.Matching pictures - to entertain
-T asks Ss to work in groups and match the -to teach or study
words or phrases with each number - to cure disease
-T explains some words -to design houses
+ visual display unit ,bridges or building
+ keyboard -Work in groups
+floppy disks -Expected answer:
-Call on some Ss to speak their answers in 1.D 4.C 7.B
3/ WHILE- front of class 2.E 5.A
READI Activity 3:Vocabulary 3.G 6.F
NG +miracle(n)->miraculous(adj)-> -Listen to T’s
miraculously(adv) explanation and copy
+calculating machine(n) a machine used for down
adding , substracting...
+lightning speed(n): very fast speed like the -Then pronounce these
lightning words in chorus
+storage device (n) a thing used to keep or
store information: thiÕt bÞ lu tr÷ th«ng tin
TASK1: Matching vocabulary
-T asks Ss to read the passage and match
the words in A ( which appear in the reading
passage) with the definition in B -Work individually
-Encourage Ss to guess the meaning of the -Expected answer:
words in the context in which they appear. 1.c
-Call on some students to read and explain 2.e
their answers in front of the class. 3.a
-Feedback and give correct answers: 4.b
TASK2:Title for passage 5.d
-Tell Ss to read the passage more carefully
and choose the best title for it
- Let Ss discuss their answer with a friend -Work in group
.Encourage them to explain their choice. -Key: C: What can the
- Give correct answer: computer do?
Task3:Answering questions
-Have Ss work in pairs and answer the
questions using the given cues.
-Go around the class and provide help if
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page47 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
necessary. Work in pairs
-Comment and give suggested answers: -Expected answer:
1.It helps us visit shops
, offices and places of
4 / POST- interests, pays bills ,
READI read newspapers ,
NG: receive letters.
Answer questions 2.Because it is capable
1.Do you usually use computers ? of doing anything you
2.What can a computer do to help us in our ask, it can speed up
daily life? the calculations, allow
3.What uses of computer may bring bad you to type and print
effects to its users? any kind of
document...

Ss discuss in pairs and


then make a small
dialogue in front of the
class
IV-Consolidation:- Retell the uses of the computer in our
daily life.
V-Homework - Learnt newwords by heart
- Prepare UNIT 5:Lesson 2:SPEAKING

TUẦN 9 UNIT:5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU


Period:27th Ngày
soạn :...../10/2009
B. SPEAKING Ngày
I.OBJECTIVES
-Helping students to talk about the uses of modern inventions
II. TEACHING AIDS:
-Tïext book
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking a student to read the passage and answer T’s questions
3- New lesson: lesson 2:SPEAKING
Teacher’s activities Students’
activities

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page48 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
1/ WARM-UP :What is it?
-T divides the whole class into two big -Work in group of
teams:A and B two
-Give team A a list of 10 words about
modern inventions:
1.TV 2.refrigerator
3.television 4.washing
machine
5.radio 6.electric cooker
7.air condition 8.car
9.computer 10.fax machine
2/ PRESENTATION -Team A has to explain the words and team
B has to guess what the word is. -Work in pairs
TASK1:Asking and answering Expected answer:
-T asks Ss to work in pairs : Ask and answer 2.Can/could you
questions about the uses of modern tell me what the
inventions following the example. TV is used for?
- T elicits the expressions -Well,It’s used to
+ S+ be used for+ V-ing the use of watch football
s.thing matches, and TV
+ S+ be used to +V-ing game shows.
Model: 3.Can/could you
A:Can/Could you tell me what a cell phone is tell me what the
use for? fax machine is
B:Well, it is used to talk to people when you used for?
are away from home -Well, it’s used to
PRACTICE: send and receive
TASK2:Sentence Completion letters quickly.
-Tkeeps Ss in pairs and asks them to 4.Can/could you
complete the sentences by using the words tell me what the
in the box. electric cooker is
-Ask Ss to study the sentences carefully used for?
before deciding which word to be used. -Well’it’s used to
-Call on some pairs to read the sentences cook rice and
aloud in front of the class. keep rice warm.
-Give correct answers;
TASK3:Ordering ideas -Work in pairs
-T asks Ss to work in groups by joining two -Expected
pairs .Ask them to look at the ideas in task 2 answer:
and then rank them in order of important. 1.store
-Encourage Ss to actively discuss in groups 6.make
to give the reasons to support their ideas 2.transmit
and persuade the others that your order is 7.send
the right one. 3.process
-Suggest some structures in discussion. 8.receive
T:In what way is important technology the 4.send
most useful to our lives? 9.design
S:I think/believe that the most important use 5.hold
of important technology
is..................................................................
3/ PRODUCTION: T Why do you think so? -Work in groups
S: -Example :
Because.......................................................... Because It can
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page49 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
............ help us
store ........

PRODUCTION
-Have Ss work in groups and talk about their
most favourite invention of our daily life.
-Comment on Ss’ performance and make
necessary corrections

IV-Consolidation:- Talk about the importance of information technology


to our daily life.
V-Homework - Learnt newwords by heart
- Prepare UNIT 5:Lesson 3:LISTENING

TUẦN : 10 UNIT:5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU


Period:28th Ngày
soạn :...../10/2009
C.LISTENING Ngày
I.OBJECTIVES:
Helping students to listen for gist and specific information about using a
computer
II.TEACHING AIDS:
text book
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking a student to name some modern inventions and
their uses
3- New lesson: lesson 3:LISTENING
STAGES TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’
ACTIVITIES

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page50 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
1/ WARM-UP :Ask and answer
-T asks Ss to work independently and The whole class
answer the question by checking the
right column.
*How often do you use each of the
items below?
Very sometim never
often es
Radio
Cell
phone
Camcorde
r
Computer
TV -Listen to T’s
2/ PRE-LISTENING Fax eliciting and copy
machine down
Tell ss to comparetheir answer with a
friend and further discuss the uses of
these items.
Activity1:Vocabulary:
+to be worried(adj):to be anxious
+shy(adj) uneasy in front of other
people
+memory(n) Ss look at the
3/ WHILE-LISTENING +to refuse(v): reject to do something VietNamese one
+ to make an excuse(v): to say sorry and recall all the
+ headache(n) pain in head English words
-Ask Ss to repeat the words several -The whole class
times to make sure they pronounce -Expected answer:
them correctly. 1.F(he wasn’t
Activity2: Rub out and remember worried)
TASK1:TRUE or FALSE 2.T
-T asks Ss to read the statements 3.T
carefully before listening to the tape. 4.F( He understood
- Play the tape more than once if about computers
necessary and became the
- Ask Ss to compare their answers with a man’s teacher.)
friend 5.F( He didn’t
- Give feedback and give correct understand the
answers: lesson very well.)
6.F
Work individually
Expected answer:
1.invited
4/ POST-LISTENING TASK2:GAP-FILLING 2.still
-Play the tape again and ask Ss to do 3.refused
task2 :Write the missing words. 4.excuse
-Tell ss to write the exact word for the 5.anything
blanks.
-Let ss discuss the answers with a friend.
-Give correct answers: -Work in pairs
-Expected answer:
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page51 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
1.a computer
2.his secretary
asked him for a
POST-LISTENING computer in his
-T asks Ss to work in pairs and ask and office
answer about the man’s story. 3.about computer
1.What did the man’s son buy? screen.
2.why did the man become worried? 4.he didn’t
3.What didn’t the man know? understand things
4.What happened to the man’s memory? which his son told
5.What did the man suggest? 5.He suggested we
should leave the
lesson

IV-Consolidation:- Retell the old man’s story.


V-Homework - Learnt newwords by heart
- Prepare UNIT 5:Lesson 4:WRITING

TUẦN : 10 UNIT:5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU


Period:29th Ngày
soạn :...../10/2009
D.WRITING Ngày
I.OBJECTIVES:
Helping students to be able to write simple instructions
II. TEACHING AIDS:
- Text book;
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking a student to tell the man’s story again in listening
3- New lesson: lesson 4:WRITING
STAGES TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’
ACTIVITIES

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page52 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
1/ WARM-UP :Matching
-T asks Ss to work in groups and -Work in group of two
match the words in A with the words -Expected answer:
in B 1.card
2.a call
A B 3.button
1.insert a.long bip 4.long bip
2.make b.button
3.press c.card
4.hear d.a call
Note:All the verbs are commonly
2/ PRESENTATION used in the language instructions
Activity1:Vocabulary: -Listen to T’s eliciting
+ to life(v) : raise to higher level and copy the meaning
+ receive(n):èng nghe of newwords
+ insert(v) put things into another - Repeat after T in
+ slot(n) khe, r·nh chorus
+ to press(v) -Rub out and remember
+emergency(n) -> ambulance: xe
cÊp cøu
+ remote control(n) a device totune
in , switch on and off the TV from a
distance
+ cord(n) thick string used as TV
wire:
-Tasks Ss to open your textbook and -The whole class answer
asks: T’s questions
1.What is it?
2.Have you ever seen /used a public -Work in pairs and work
telephone? individually
3.Can you show me hoe to use it? -Expected answer:
Activity2:TASK2:Finding Connectors: first, next,
connectors and Imperatives then, until
-T asks Ss to read the following set Imperatives:life,
of instructions on how to use a insert, press, wait
public telephone.
-T goes around the class and provide
help if necessary
-Tell ss to work in pairs to find out
the connectors and the imperative
forms of the verbs from the -Work in groups of four
instructions -Expected answer:
- Call on some Ss to read their 1.If you want to operate
answers aloud in front of the class. the TV with the remote
-Feedback and give correct answers: control, you have to
PRACTICE make sure that the cord
TASK3 : Answering questions is plugged in and the
-T asks Ss to work in groups : Look main is turned on
at the TV and the remote control 2.-Press the POWER
and answer the questions on how to button
operate the TV - to turn off the TV ,
-Let them have 4 minutes, then call press the POWER again
3.Press the
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page53 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
some Ss to answer them carefully PROGRAMME button
Feedback and give correct answers: 4.Press the number
1,2,3,4...
5. Press the VOLUME
button up and down
6.Press the MUTE
button

-Work individually
TASK4 :Writing instructions EX:If you want to
4/ PRODUCTION -T asks Ss to write a set of operate a TV with a
instructions on how to operate a TV remote control, you
with a remote control.Use the must make sure
picture in the book and the answers that.............
above as suggestions To turn on the TV ,
-Tell ss to compare their writing with press......
a friend
- Peer correction
-Feedback and give correct answers: - Correct their mistakes
PRODUCTION in writing
- Call on some Ss to write their
writing on the blackboard and the
whole class correct together.
IV-Consolidation:- Howto write instructions
V-Homework - Make the instructions on how to use an ATM card
- Prepare UNIT 5:Lesson 5:LABGUAGE FOCUS

TUẦN : 10 UNIT:5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU


Period:30th Ngày
soạn :...../10/2009
E.LANGUAGE FOCUS Ngày
I.OBJECTIVES:
- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to
- Distinguishing the suonds /u:/ and /u/
- Review the present perfect and present perfect passive
II. TEACHING AIDS
- Text book
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking a student to instruct on hoe to use a public telephone
3- New lesson: lesson 5:LANGUAGE FOCUS
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page54 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
1/ WARM-UP :Categorising - Work in group and
-T gives out 10 to 15 words and asks put the words order
Ss to put the words under the the heading
appropriate heading: +who: nurse, teacher,
who which where Lan, Mary’s parents,
2 / EXPLAINATION professor
PRONOUNCIATION:/u/ and /u:/ + which: book, school
1.Example: sugar ruler ruler,
/u/ /u:/ + museum, house,
-T helps Ss to distinguish two sounds hospital
*/ u/:a short sound -Listen to T's eliciting
*/u:/ :a long sound and copy down
-Ask them to listen and repeat
several times
2.Practice:
-Open their textbooks and practise
the sentences -The whole class and
-Calls on some Ss to pronounce two give answers
sounds
3/ PRESENTATION - Peer correction
- CORECTION GRAMMAR AND VOCABULARY
The present perfect
-T asks Ss to revise the form and use
of the present perfect -Listen to T's eliciting
1.Form: and takes notes
+S + have/has + V(pp) - Give examples
+S + have /has not +
V( pp)
+ Have/ Has+ S + V(pp) ?
2.Use: to express an action which
began in the past and still continutes
ADV: “for” with a period of time,
“since” a point in time
3.Exercise 1:Study the situation and
put the verbs in the present perfect
tense Expected answer:
- Call on some ss to give correct 1.Tan has opened the
answers door.
2.He has turned /
swiched on the TV
3.he has tidied the
house
The present perfect passive: 4.he has cleaned the
1.Form:AV: S+have/has +V(pp) +O floor
5.He has turned/
swiched on the lights
S+ have/ has+ been + V(pp) 6.He has laid two
+ by O bottles of water on the
Ex: They have built a new bridge table.
across the river
->A new bridge across the river
has been built.
2.Exercise 2: Build the sentences
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page55 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
after the model.Use the present
perfect passive
- Check and give feedback Work individually
Expected answer:
1.A new hospital for
children has been built
in our city
Relative Clause: WHO ,WHICH 2.Another man made
and THAT satellite has been sent
Relative perso thin functio up into space
pronoun n g n 3.More and more trees
Who x Subject have been cut down
Which x Object for woods by
Whom x S.O farmers......
Whose x x Possessi
ve
that x x S,O
-T asks Ss to do exercise 3: Fill in the
blanks with who which or that.
- Call on some Ss to read their
sentences aloud in front of the class.
- Give correct answers: -Work individually
-Expected answer:
1.which
7.whom
2.which
8.which
3.which
9.which
4.who 10.
who
5.who
6.who

IV-Consolidation:- Game :Lucky Number


V-Homework - Do exercise 1,2,3
- Prepare UNIT 6Lesson 1:READING

CHƯA SỮA ĐƯỢC

D.P:01/11/08 Period:31
D.T:3/11/08 clas10A5;4/11/08 class10A9
UNIT 6. AN EXCURSION
A. READING
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page56 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
- get information about some famous places in Vietnam through activities Before and
After you read.
- improve reading comprehension skill by doing Multiple choice and Answering questions
exercises.
II. TEACHING AIDS: Textbook…
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking a student to give correct forms of verbs
3- New lesson: lesson 1:READING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
WARMER:Matching -The whole class
-T promts six pictures and asks P1: It is Thien mu
T: What is it? andWhat are they located? pagoda
Place Location P2:The one Pillar
1.Thien Mu Pagoda a.DaLat pagada
2.The One Pillar b.HaNoi P3:Valley of love
Pagoda c.Hue P4:Ha Long Bay
3.Valley of Love d.Quang P5:Japanese Covered
4.Ha Long Bay Ninh Bridge
5.Japanese Covered e.Hoi An P6.Huong Pagoda
Bridge g.HaTay -Ss work in groups of 4,
6.Huong Pagoda then go to the
-T goes around the class and asks them blackboard and write
1.Which places do you like to come best? their answers
1.Do you usually have an excursion?When?Where? -Expected answer:
T introduces the new lesson: Nowadays We are going 1.c 2.b 3.a 4.d
to read a letter from Lan to her friend ,Minh about his 5.e 6.g
recent interesting excursion to cave near HaNoi.We
will come to read the letter : EXCURSION
PRE-READING
Activity 1:Brainstorming
-T asks Ss to answer the questions what activities do
you often do when you have a few days off. -The whole class
-Ss answer T’s questions
Activites when by brainstorm of
you activites
have some + going aboard / visiting
days off a foreign country
Activity2 : Teaching vocabulary + visiting friends/
-T asks Ss to work in pairs and match a verb with an relatives
object + travelling to cities/
Verb Object travelling through their
1.to have a.an excursion own coutry by car or
2.to make b.our love to them train
3.to give c.a two -day trip -The whole class read
4.to make d.some days off through the box and
5.to stay e.the night away match them
from home -Ss give equivalent
-T helps them to elicit the meaning of phrases Vietnamese meaning if
- pronounce the in chorus necessarily
-Check their understanding by giving the correct form -Expected answer:
of above verbs 1.d 2.a 3.b
4.c 5.d
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page57 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
Checking Vocabulary: Gap-filling - Repeat after T
1.We are going to make an excursion when we
have some days off after the first term.
2.My family has stayed the night away from home at
a hotel near beach
3.When we come home, please give my love to your
parents.
4.We will make a four-day trip by air port to
Australia.
WHILE-READING
TASK1:Multiple choice
-After asking Ss to read a letter silently in 3 minutes. -Ss read the letter
T asks to choose the best answer A,B,C or D to silently in 3 minutes
complete each of the sentences after that doing task 1
- Tell ss to compare their answers with a friend. -Ss compare their
- call on some ss to read and explain their answers in answer with a partner
front of the class. Key:
-Feedback and give correct answers: 1.d ,2.b ,3.a ,4.c
TASK2 Answer questions
-T asks Ss to work in pairs and answer the questions -Work in pairs
-Call on some pairs to act out the activity in front of -Expected answer:
class 1.After the 1st term ends
- Check their answers 2. Have a two day trip
and ......
POST-READING: Campfire
TASK3 :Summary Completion 3.Her parent’s
-Have Ss to work in group and fill each blank with a permission. They may
suitable group of words from the text not want to let her stay
-Exchange their paper into another group to correct the night away from
mistakes home.
- Ask Ss to look at the board and correct - Work in groups
-T corrects their comment of each group Ss write their answers on
- Feedback and give correct answers: a small paper.Then
CONSOLIDATION exchange into another
Game: Find someone who likes... group to correct
Find someone who likes... Name mistakes
Visiting a famous place -Expected answer:
Taking a bicycle tour
Going fishing Ss work in group of four
Visiting relatives and make “yes-no”
Relaxing at the beach questions about your
Having a picnic excursion .If one
Staying at home and reading a answers”yes”, write
book his/her name into your
paper. The reprentative
will stand up and report
their group’s result.
IV-Consolidation:- Ask Ss to close your textbook and retell a letter again
V-Homework - Learn newwords by heart
- Prepare UNIT 6 Lesson 2:SPEAKING

D.P: 01/11/08 Period:31


D.T:4/11class 10A5; 5/11/08; class 10A9
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page58 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
UNIT 6. AN EXCURSION
B. SPEAKING
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about the seat plan on a boat trip
on Lake Michigan in Chicago.
II.TEACHING AIDS:textbook….
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking a student to read the text and answer T’s
questions
3- New lesson: lesson 2:SPEAKING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
Warmer:Brainstorming
-T asks Ss to brainstorm about things which -Work in groups of four
they can plan for an excursion. * tickets, money, food ,
drink, .....
Preparation for
an excursion

PRESENTATION:
Activity1:Vocabulary
-T helps Ss to explain some newwords -Listen to T's eliciting and
+ sundeck(n) boong taìu take notes
+toget sunburnt(v) the skin hurt or destroy by - Repeat these words in
the sunlight chorus
+ travel sickness (n) the state of being sick due
to travelling
+ air -conditioned >< non- airconditioned
+ refreshment(N) room that serves food and
drinks to refresh in a boat. -Read the information for
+ occupied(adj) being kept, in use suitable person
Activity2: Slap the board -Ss make plan suitable
-T draws the diagram of the ship in textbook seats for each person
and asks Ss to slap the places in the blank. + Mrs Andrew: aren’t in
-air-conditioned ---toilet the sun deck , can help see
-non-air conditioned ----refreshment all the students
- sundect ----exit ( seat: 46,43,40,35,34)
Activity3.Task 1&2 Conversation conduct + Mary: have plenty of
-T asks Ss to work in groups . Read the seat fresh air
plan carefully and decide the best seat for each ( seat : 31,37,19,20,26,32)
person, using the information in Task 1 + Susan: near Mary , not
* Suggest some structures want to get sunburnt
I don’t think so ( seat:33)
To be suitable for....... + John: aren’t air-
Why? Why not? conditioned, suitable for
What do you think? taking
What’s your idea? photographs(seat:10,11,12)
Had better + Tim: are in the
-Tells Ss to conduct the conversation like the sundeck(seat:1,6)
example the book +Sam: a good view( seat
- Go around the class and provide help when 16, 29, 34)
necessary.

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page59 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
-Call on some groups to conduct the
conversation in front of class.
-Comment and give correct answers:
Example:
A: I think seat 1 is most suitable for Mary.
B: Why?
C.Because she suffers from travel sickness so
she can get a lot fresh air from that seat.
......
PRODUCTION
Task 3: Give reasons
-Tell Ss to work in pairs and discuss:
-T supplies some suggested questions
* Which seat do you think the most suitable for
you?
* Why? -Ss work individually and
* Use information in task 1 as suggestions work in pairs
-Call on some Ss to talk about their seat -Ss choose a suitable seat on
reference in front of the class. a boat for yourself and give
-Comment and make necessary corrections. reason
-Free- talk

4-Consolidation:- Summarise the main points


5-Homework - Learn newwords by heart
- Prepare UNIT 6Lesson 3:LISTENING

D.P: 02/11/08 Period:32


D.T:5/11class10A5; 6/11 class 10A9
UNIT 6. AN EXCURSION
C. LISTENING
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to improve their listening skill through
Ordering, Gap-filling and Answering questions exercises.
II. TEACHING AIDS:textbook; cassette….

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page60 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking 2 students to ask and answer about a plan for an
excursion
3- New lesson: lesson 3:LISTENING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
Warmer:Find someone who...? -The whole class
DO YOU........ NAME -Ss go around the class and
like to go for a picnic? Hai ask other Ss what used to do
go with your family /friends? when they were small.If the
always go to the beach for a picnic? answer is YES, write his/ her
always go to the mountain for a name in the table.
picnic? -The winner is the first one
bring food with you when you go for a who completes the Name
picnic? column
like to take a lot of photos and sing
together?
PRE-LISTENING -Work in pairs.Ask and
Activity1: Questions and answer answer questions
-T asks Ss to work in pairs and discuss the -Free- talk
following questions
* Do you often go to for picnic?
* When is the most important time for a picnic?
* Why do you go for a picnic?
* What do you prepare for you’re a picnic? -Listen to T's eliciting and
Activity2:Present vocabulary take notes
+ glorious( adj) beautiful, shining - Repeat these words in
+ assemble(v) = gather chorus
+destination(n) a place to which a person is
going to
+ left-over(n) the rest
+ delicious(a) tasty
+Botanic Garden ( translation)
+spacious(a) large, have a lot of space
+ sleep soundly(v) to be in deep sleep
-T asks Ss to repeat these and introduce these -Ss remenber the deleted
words will appear in the listening words and rewrite on the
Activity3:Rub out and remember board
WHILE-LISTENING
TASK1: Pictures ordering -Work in pairs .Listen and
-T introduces the situation and then asks Ss to make order the pictures
work in pairs and study the pictures carefully -Expected answer:
- Make sure Ss have ideas about the pictures 1.a 2.e 3.b
and they can tell the differences among them 4.c 5.f 6.d
-Have ss to listen to the tape and number the
pictures in order you hear.Let Ss do the task in
pairs
-Call on some Ss to explain their answers in
front of class.
-Feedback and give correct answers: -Work individually
TASK2:Gap -filling -Expected answer:
-Listen again and fill the blanks with the exact 1.was just a few
words you hear. 2.to pay a visit
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page61 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
-before listening,T asks Ss to read the 3.at the school gate
sentences xarefully and have a guess of the 4.a short tour
missing words first. 5.playing some more
-Play the tape twice times and asks Ss to -Work in pairs .Ask and
compare their answers with a partner answer questions
-Call on some Ss to read aloud their answers Expected answer:
-Check and give feedback 1.The weather was very nice
TASK3: Answering questions 2.Yes, it is.
-T asks Ss to work in pairs .Ask and answer the 3.The garden was beautiful
questions 4.They could sleep suondly
-Let them have 2 minutes to practise and then beacause it was so peaceful
call on some Ss to practise aloud in front of and quiet in the garden
class 5.They took pictures plays
- Feedback and give correct answers: games, talked sang and
POST-LISTENING danced
Work in groups: If your class could go for a - Work in groups and talk
picnic this weekend, what would your plan be? about their plan in front of
+ destination: class.
+ Means of transport:
+ How many:
+ How long:
+ Who with:
+What activities:
+Bring any food?
4-Consolidation:- Retell a short talk about a picnic that you have just listened
5-Homework - Learn newwords by heart
- Prepare UNIT 6Lesson 4:WRITING

D.P: 03/11/08 Period:33


D.T:
UNIT 6. AN EXCURSION
D. WRITING
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write a confirmation letter responding to
a request and an invitaion.
II. TEACHING AIDS:textbook; cassette….
III.PROCEDURE:

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page62 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking 2 students to ask and answer about a plan of your
picnic at weekend 3- New lesson: lesson 4:WRITING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
WARMER:Network -Work in groups
T asks Ss to combine these words with - Ss read their answers
LETTER
Bussiness
Friendly
Invitation
Apology
Thank you LETTER
Complaint
Love
Confirmation
Get well
PRE-WRITING: - The whole class listen and
Activity 1: answer T’s questions
-Tasks: When do you write a request - Ss discuss with another
letter? friend to find out their
When do you write a definition
confirmation letter? -Expected answer:
- T explains the defintion of request and Request: is the letter that
confirmation letters. asks for information for help
Activity 2: Presenting vocabulary Confirmation:is the letter
+ to pick someone up;(v) that responds to the
+ to be convenient for (exp) request. It confirms whelther
+ Let s.one have an early reply: meaning the help is provided or the
WHILE-WRITING information is avaiable or
Activity 1:TASK1: Finding out the not.
request and confirmation in two
letters
-T asks Ss to work individually .Read the - The whole class read two
two letters and find out the request and letters silents
confirmation in Nga’s letter and -Ss read their answers
confirmation in Hoa’s letter. -Expected answer:
-T calls on some Ss to read their answer. - Listen to T's eliciting and
- T listens and checks them copy down
Activity 2: Useful language
+ I am glad / happy to receive/ join/
know........next Saturday.
+ Certainly , I will help you to
................everything for.....
+ I am willing to help you ......for..
+ Firstly , let me congratulate you on
your 15th birthday.
+ I look forward to seeing you soon .
+ I will be waiting for you tomorrow . - Work individually and the
......................... whole class
Activity 3: Reading two situations in - Choose one situation that
the textbook they want to write and make
- T asks Ss to read two situations in the an outline first.
textbook and explain the request in both
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page63 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
two letters.
- Choose one situation that they want to
write and make an outline first.
- T goes around and help them
- T can collect their mistakes and then - Write their writing on the
writes them on the blackboard to correct board while the others
and gives comments checks and correct mistakes
PRODUCTION
Writing a full letter
- Let them have 10 minutes towrite , T
calls on two Ss to write them on the
board.
- T asks Ss to look at carefully and give
their ideas
- Finally , T checks again and give their
comments with the class.

4-Consolidation:- How to write a confirmation letter


5-Homework - Learn newwords by heart
- Write your writing fully
- Prepare UNIT 6:Lesson 5:LANGUAGE FOCUS

D.P: 04/11/08 Period:34


D.T:
UNIT 6. AN EXCURSION
E. LANGUAGE FOCUS
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- pronounce the sounds /ə / and / З: / correctly
- distinguish the present progressive (with a future meaning) and be going
to and use them appropriately.
II. TEACHING AIDS:textbook;
III.PROCEDURE:

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page64 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking Ss about tenses that you learnt
3- New lesson: lesson 5:LANGUAGE FOCUS
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
WARMER: - The whole class
- T asks Ss to pick out the word whose - Some Ss read their
underlined part is different the others answers aloud
1a.award b.thaw c.claw d.draw -Expected answer:
2a.writer b.term c.preserve 1A 2.B 3.D
d.reserve 4.B
3a.earn b.bird c.fir d.other
4a.today b.nurse c.from d.of
PRONUNCIATION /ə:/ and /ə/
-T helps Ss to distinguish two sounds
*/ə /:a short sound -Ss distinguish two sound
*/ə:/ :a long sound and listen to T’s elicit
-Ask them to listen and repeat several times - Listen and repeat the
2.Practice: words in ther textbook
-Open their textbooks and practise the Note :minimal pairs
sentences /ə/ /ə:/
-Calls on some Ss to pronounce two sounds Was were
- Peer correction Some sir
GRAMMAR: Future tenses Does dirt
1 Examples:T gives some situations and asks from fir
Ss to give the correct form of verb in
parenthese -Ss give the correct form of
a.Tom: I hear Mary is in hospital now verb in parenthese
Jim: Really ? I (see)............. her tomorrow - Ss read and give their
b.Mary : Let’s go to the cinema tonight explanation
Mai: Sorry.I ( help) ............my sister with her - Expected answer:
homework tonight. 1.I will see
c.Look! It’s cloudy and windy. It (rain) 2.I am helping
........very hard 3.It is going to rain
d.Tom: Where are you going now? 4.I am going to buy
Jack: I ( buy).........something for my birthday
party at weekend.
2.Form and use: - The whole class discuss in
a.S+ will/ shall -bare infinitive pairs and give the their
-> talking about St coming out the moment at forms and uses of future
speaking tenses
b.S+ am/is/are + V-ing + adverb of time - Ss write them into their
with a future meaning notebooks
-> talking about plan as in agenda(phaíi coï/
laìm viãûc gç)
-is used to replace to verbs:go , come, arrive
in near future.
Ex: He is going to arrive at 11.30
He is arriving at 11.30
c.S + am/ is /are + going to + bare
infinitive
-> talking about something planned before
the moment of speaking or something which is
surely to happy soon.
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page65 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
-> talking about prediction(dæûa vaìo nhæîng
caïi coï åí hiãûn taûi)
PRODUCTION - Work individually
Exercise 1,2,3
Exercise 1:Choose the best option
-Ask Ss to work individually and choose the
best option.Encourage Ss to give explanation.
-Have Ss compare their answers with a friend.
-Call on some ss to read their completed
sentences.
-Feedback and give correct answers:
Exercise 2,3: Verb tense
-Ask Ss to work individually andgive the
correct form of verbs in parentheses
.Encourage Ss to give explanation.
-Have Ss compare their answers with a friend.
-Call on some ss to read their completed
sentences.
-Feedback and give correct answers

4-Consolidation:- Retell the form and uses of future tenses


5-Homework - Do all exercises again and do more in workbook
- Prepare TEST YOUR SELF B

D.P: 11/11/08 Period:35


D.T:17/11 class10A5;18/11 class 10A9
TEST YOURSELF B
I.OBJECTIVES:
Helping Ss test their knowledge that you learnt in unit 4,5,6
II.TEACHING AIDS: textbook…
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking Ss to answer about grammar
3- New lesson: TEST YOUR SELF B
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page66 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
WARMER:Answering questions - The whole class retell what they
-T asks Ss to answer the questions have learnt from U4-U6
1.What have you learnt about grammar
and topic:Education?
2.What are they?
PRESENTATION:
I-LISTENING:Listening and completing
the table -Work individually
-T asks Ss to look through the information - Listen and complete the
in the table and understand them. information in the table
-T can help Ss by asking some questions -Some Ss read their answers to
and explains newwords the class
+ location:What is reading located? -Expected answer:
+ Population: How many people / Reading Oxford
inhabitants are there in the reading? 50 miles to the In the central
+Noted for: What is this town famous for? west of England
- T asks Ss to guess what kind of word to London
complete in echa item? 120.000 90.000 people
-T plays the tape twice and calls some Ss inhabitants/
to give answers people
-Feedback and give correct answers: Market town University
Biscuits Car factory
factory Cowley Road
II-READING: Reading the passage and Computer
dicide whelther the following staterments industry
are true or false
-T asks Ss to read five statements and
understand them carefully - Work in groups
- Go back to the passage and find its -Expected answer:
location .Then give their answer 1F( too much)
-T goes around the class and encourages 2.F( unneccessary)
help if necessary. 3.T
-T explains some newwords: 4F(repeat)
-T calls some Ss to give answers 5T
III-GRAMMAR:Mstake correction
-T can explain how to do the exercise in
grammar
- One word is missing from each line . Put
a stoke (/) where thw word has been -Work in pairs
omitted and write the missing word in the -Expected answer:
space provided. 0-inventions are carried
-Let them have 5 minutes to practise and 1.out by scientists
encourage them to compate their 2.opportunities for other people
answers with a peer. 3.there is a weekly
-T calls some Ss to give answers in front 4.television programme which
of the class. /that attempts
-Feedback and give correct answers: 5.all the various
6.oranizing the programme
7.inventions a /per year
8.developed by private
9.However, it is important
10.Will it be wanted?
IV-WRITING:Writing a letter of - Listen to T's eliciting and work
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page67 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
permission individually
-T guides Ss to retell how to write a letter - After finshing , Two Ss go to the
of permission board and write them down.
( how many parts, form,content.........)
-T asks Ss to to work individually and
peer correction
- T calls 2 Ss to go to the blackboard and
write down your writing .
- T checks and corrects their mistakes

4-Consolidation:- Retell all grammatical points from U4 to U6.


5-Homework - Do all exercises again and do more in workbook
- Prepare ONE PERIOD TEST 2

Date ....../....../200
period:37th

LESSON PLAN
******
A.OBJECTIVE:
I-Knowledge: Helping students to correct ONE PERIOD TEST 2
II-Skill : Reading,speaking,listening and writing skill
B.PROCEDUCE:
I-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
II-Checking: Sharing papers with Students
III- New lesson: Correcting ONE PERIOD TEST 2
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page68 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
De -1 De-2
I-Pronunciation : (1m) I-Pronunciation : (1m)
1.C 1.C
2.D 2.A
3.A 3.A
4.B 4.D
II-Multiple choice (3ms) II-Multiple choice (3ms)
1.A 7.B 1.B 7.D
2.C 8.D 2.A 8.B
3.A 9.C 3.C 9.A
4.D 10.D 4.D 10.C
5.B 11A 5.B 11.C
6.A 12.A 6.C 12.C

III-Writing(2ms) III-Writing(2ms)
1.First, put the clothes in the machine 1.First wash the rice in cold water
2.Next to, add some detergent to the 2.Then put the rice in a pot
clothes 3.Next , pour water into the pot
3.Check the back of the detergent box 4.And after that you bring it to the
to see how much you should use owen.
4.After that set the water temperature 5.Cook ot about 20 minutes slowly
5.Then put some coins in the slot to 6.Bring the spot out of the oven
start the machine 7.Finally, you can serve your meal.
6.wait for the machine to finish
7.Then take out the clothes
8.Finally put them to dry in a drier

IV-READING:(2ms) Gap -filling IV-READING:(2ms) Gap -filling


1.at 1.T
2.picnic 2.F
3.washes 3.F
4.family 4.F
5.countryside 5.T
6.in 6.NG
7.end 7.F
8.hungry 8.T
V-Listening(2ms) V-Listening(2ms)
1.on 1.on
2.catching 2.catching
3.cinema 3.cinema
4.used to be 4.used to be
5.play 5.play
6.use 6.use
7.buy 7.buy
8.which 8.which

IV-Consolidation:- What have you learnt inUnit 4,5 and 6


V-Homework - Review all grammtical points and vocabularies.
- Prepare Unit 7 lesson 1: READING

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page69 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10

D.P: Period:38
D.T:
UNIT 7:THE MASS MEDIA
A.READING
I. Objectives
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to :
- update with names of some popular TV programmes such as Quiz Show, Portrait
of life…
- able to talk about their favourite programmes.
II. Materials
Textbook, whiteboard markets,…
TV schedules extracted from newspapers
III. Procedure.
1.Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: No
3- New lesson: lesson 1:READING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page70 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
WARMER: Jumpled letters
-T asks Ss to work in groups of two and - Work in groups of two and
arrange these jumpled letters into a arrange these jumpled
meaningful words letters into a meaningful
1.N T E N I E R T-> words
2.K B OO-> - Go to the board and write
3.N P A E W S E R P-> their answers quickly
4.D O I A R-> - Expected answer:
5.Z I N E M A A G-> 1.Internet
6.L T E E I S O N V I -> 2.book
- T asks: 3.newspaper
1.What are they? 4.radio
2.Have you got a TV? Which programme 5.magazine
do you usually watch? 6.television
3.Which channel do you like most? Why? * They are THE MASS
MEDIA
PRE-READING - The whole class answer T’s
Activity 1: Vocabulary: RUB OUT AND questions
REMEMBER -The whole class read
+ TV series: through the TV programme
+ population and development: on VTV1, VTV2 and VTV3
+ folk song: and find out the
+ News headlines: newwords
+ Weather forecast: -Give the VietNamese
+ Quiz show: equivalent of some TV
+ Portrait of life: programme
+ Documentary: - Rub out and remember
+ Wild life World: - Read them carefully
+ Around the world:
- T deleles the VietNamese equivalent and
asks Ss to go to the board and write all of
them again
- T asks Ss to read them carefully
Activity 2: TASK 1: MATCHING
VOCABULARY - Work individually and pair
-Ask Ss to match the words in A appear in the work
reading passage with their definitions in B - Expected answer:
- Have Ss compare their answers with a friend 1.e 2.a 3.d
- Calls on some Ss to stand up and read their 4.b
answer aloud
- Feedback and give correct answers:
WHILE- READING
Activity 3: TASK2:TRUE OR FALSE
-Tells Ss to read the programme carefully and - Work individually and give
decide whether the staterments are true or answers
false.Correct the fasle information 1.T
- Ask Ss to explain their answer by giving 2.T
evidence in the reading passage 3.F( on VTV3)
- Call on some Ss to give feedback 4.T
Activity 4: ANSWERING QUESTIONS 5.F( the last programme
- Ask Ss to work in pairs and ask and asnwer starts at 23:30)
the questions in their textbook - Work in pairs
- Call some pairs to practise aloud in front of 1.There are five films on
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page71 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
class 2.At 9.00a.m , 12.ooat noon,
- Listen and give the correct answers 7.00p.m on VTV1, and 7.00
p.m on VTV3
POST -READING :ROLE-PLAY 3.on VTV2
- T gives some given words and asks Ss to 4.The quiz show
work in pairs to make a dialogue. 5.on VTV1
A: You/ often / watch/ TV? 6.The football
B:......................................................................
- Role play
......... - Make a dilogue with your
A:How often/ you/ watch/it? partner
B:......................................................................
In pairs
.........
A:Which programme/ you / like / best?
B:......................................................................
.........
A: Why?
B:......................................................................
........
4-Consolidation:- Retell the programme on TV that you like best and the
reason why
5-Homework - Learn vocabularies by heart
- Prepare Lesson 2: SPEAKING

D.P: Period:39
D.T:
UNIT 7:THE MASS MEDIA
B.SPEAKING
I.OBJECTIVES:
: Helping Ss talk about the differences and similaries of some popular
types of the mass media
II. TEACHING AIDS: Textbook
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Telling what the programme on TV that you like best and
the reason why
3- New lesson: lesson 2:SPEAKING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page72 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
Warmer: LUCKY NUMBER
- Work in group of two and
, 1 2 choose the number
- Listen to T's questions
and answer
What is it ? -Expected answer:
1.Television
4 5 2.Radio The
mass media
Questions: 3.Newspaper
1.It was invented in 1925 4.The internet
2.We can listen to the news but we can’t see it
3.It contains information and pictures
4.We use it to find information quiclky, chat with
friends and send email.
PRE-SPEAKING
Activity 1: TASK 1
- Ask Ss to work in pairs . Which of the following
are the types of the mass media ? Why?
- T helps Ss elicit the reason why
* Mass media or mass communcations refer to - Work in pairs and give
publi institution that report news and other stories their answers
. Mas media also keep people updated( cáûp + television
nháût , cho ai nhæîng thäng tin måïi) + the internet
Activity 2: Vocabulary: + newspaper
+ to present(v): + magazine
+ to provide(v): + radio
+ to deliver(v):
+ orally( adv) = through mouth - Read through the
+ aurally(adv) = through ears features the types of the
+ visually(adv) = through eyes mass media in task 2
- T asks Ss to read these words in chorus have in common and find
WHILE -SPEAKING out some newwords
TASK 2: Cross (x) in the right column - Read them carefully
- T asks Ss to look the table and cross the types of
the mass media with its features.
- T goes around to help them -Ss work in group and
Features The mass media decide which features of
TV Radio Internet the mass media in the
book table and cross
1.provide information and X X X - Some Ss read their
entertainment orally answers in front of class.
2.receive information aurally X X
3.present information and X X X
entertainment visually.
4.receive information visually X X X
5.present information and X - Work in pairs . Ask and
entertainment orally and answer about the features
visually of the mass media
6.get information aurally and X - Some pairs practise a
visually
7.provide/ deliver information X X X X dialogue again in front of
and entertainment class
*T asks Ss to look at the table and answer T’s - Role- play:
questions A: What are the
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page73 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
T:When do you often get information ? different types of the
S: From TV mass madia?
T: What is the difference between getting B.TV, films, books,
information from TV and radio? magazines, radio,
S: TV presents information and entertainment newspaper, plays, the
visually and we receive them through eyes internet
*Substitution drills A. What features do
- T asks Ss to practise the same dialogue that T they have in common?
has made in pairs B.Provide information and
- Calls on some pairs to practise again in front of entertainment
class A.What are their own
POST -SPEAKING features?
Work in groups : Talk about different types of the B. TV presents
mass media .Ask and answer the questions in information and
textbook. entertainment visually

4-Consolidation:- Retell the features of mass media


5-Homework - Learn new words by heart
- Prepare Lesson 3: LISTENING

D.P: Period:40
D.T:
UNIT 7:THE MASS MEDIA
C.LISTENING
I.OBJECTIVES:
Helping Ss listen two news on radio and get information
-improve listening skill
II.TTEACHING AIDS: Textbook
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking a student to tell about the features of TV
3- New lesson: lesson 3:LISTENING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page74 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
WARMER: Guessing game -The whole class listen to T’s
questions and guess what it is
- Give the explanation about it
What is it?

Questions:
1.It is one of the radio programme
2.It broadcasts daily and live from redio
station
3.It updates you with the lastest
informatin , current affairs domestically
and internationally
-> NEWS/ NEWS BROADCAST -Free-talk
PRE-LISTENING - Answer the questions in the
Activity 1: Answering the questions textbook
1.How often do you listen to the radio?
2.How many hours per week do you - Listen to T's eliciting
listen to it?
3.What programme do you like listening
to and why?
* T instructs to the new lesson: News
broadcast is a popular programme on the - Work individually
radio. Today you will listen to a short -Look at the table and
news edition. You will listen and do the understand them
tasks assigned - Give the meaning of the words
WHILE -LISTENING - Read them in chorus
TASK1: Ticking in the right column
- Elicit the items of the news and
understand them clearly
- Help Ss explain some newwords in the News story News story 2
table 1
+ health(n) -> healthy( adj) Healthy V
+ strong (adj) Strong V
+ cloud(n) -> cloudy(adj) Young V
- Ask Ss to read them carefully and Cloudy V
notice that these words appear in the Highest V
Wonderfull V
tape y
- Play the tape three times for Ss
listening
- Check their answers in front of class - Work individually and pair-
work
- Expected answer:
TASK 2: Gap-filling *.News story 1 *.News
- Let Ss read the two news stories story 2
carefully and have the guess of the 1.has caused floods 1.twenty
missing words third
- play the tape again and ask Ss to fill in 2.have left their house 2.4.418
the missing words. 3.have risen
- EncourageSs to compare their answers 3.California
with a peer 4.two metres
- call on some Ss to read completed 4.Wonderful
stories loudly 5.has stopped 5.young
- Listen to their comments
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page75 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
- feedback and give correct answers: and
6.cloudy health
7.strong wind

TASK3: Answering the questions


- Ask Ss to work in pairs and answer the
question without textbook. - Work in pairs
- Call on some pairs to practise loud in -Expected answer:
frontof class 1.Heavy rain has caused floods
- Give the correct answers all over the country during the
POST -LISTENING: night
Work in groups : Choose one of the 2.Beacause riverts has risen
new stories and tell your classmate about 3.The old woman has climbed
it. Mount Whiteney twenty three
times
4.Beacause it has kept her
young and healthy

4-Consolidation:- Summary two news stories in groups


5-Homework - Learn new words by heart
- Prepare Lesson 4: WRITING

D.P: Period:41
D.T:
UNIT 7:THE MASS MEDIA
D. WRITING
I.OBJECTIVES:
Helping Ss write advantages and disadvantages about mass media.

II. TEACHING AIDS


III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
1-Checking: Asking a student to retell about two stories in previous
lesson
3- New lesson: lesson 4:WRITING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page76 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
WARMER: QUESTIONS
-T asks Ss to close their textbook and - Work in pairs :Ask and answer
answer T’s questions the questions in the textbook
1.What are some kinds of the mass - Some pairs practise loudly
media?
2.Which one is the most popular?
3.What are advantages and
disadvantages of TV? -Work in groups of two.Brainstorm
PRESENTATION about and disadvantages of TV
TASK1: BRAINSTORMING Group 1 Group
-T asks Ss to close their textbook again 2
- T divides the whole class into groups ,
asks them list advantages and Advantages
disadvantages of TV on small paper disadvantages
- Let them have 3 minutes and then of TV of
exchange their paper into another group TV
- Open their book and check
- T elicits some newwords and -Listen to T's eliciting and copy
structures down
+ help sb do/ to do Sth -Read them in chorus
+ make sb/st/do st /adj
Ex: he makes me tired/cry
+ the popularity = to be famous for ->
popular( adj)
+ to be aware of
+ brain(n)
+ to encourage(v)-> encouragous(adj)
+ to interfere(v) = to prevent
TASK2:Talk about advantages and -Work in groups of four
disadvantages of mass media -Discuss about the mass media
-T divides the whole class into four -The representative of each group
groups and discuss about advantages present their ideas in front of class
and disadvantages of the following mass -Expected answer:
media Radio:
Handout: * - make people happy
- Life easier /relax
Mass media advantag disadvanta -get /enlarge /broaden knowledge
es ges understanding
1.Listening to *waste time
radio Make people passive
Newpaper:
2.Reading *get information on many fields
newspaper :culture, art, bussiness
3.Using a Relax and entertainment
computer *harm people eyes
4.Using The Be short-sighted
Cost time and money
internet Make people passive
-T asks Ss to discuss and write their ideas Internet:
in the handout *get information on many fields
-T lets them have 3 minutes .then calls Provide quick and daily access to
information and entertainment
on a representative of each group
*cost a lot of time and money
present their ideas in front of class make people passive
- Listen and give comments Influence on the way people
WRITING Take tmes away from

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page77 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
-T asks Ss to write a paragraph about activites
advantages and disadvantages of the Work individually and exchange
following mass media their writing into nather student to
Discussed in Task 2 correct mistake together
Useful language :
* There are some advantages and
disadvantages that radio brings us..........
* Updated information , conviences.....
*Firstly/secondly/next to/ Lastly
* In conclusion,..
-Let Ss work individually and write under
time pressure
-Peer correction
-Pick up some writing to correct in front
of class

4-Consolidation:- Summarize their main points


5-Homework - Write a letter completetly
- Prepare Lesson 5: LANGUAGE FOCUS

D.P: Period:42
D.T:
UNIT 7:THE MASS MEDIA
E. LANGUAGE FOCUS
I.OBJECTIVES:
Helping Ss revise the present perfect and using because of and although.

II.TEACHING AIDS
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Talk about advantages and disadvantages of the following
mass media
3- New lesson: lesson 5:LANGUAGE FOCUS
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page78 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
WARMER: Categorising -Work in groups of four
-T asks Ss to work in geroups of 4 and - Put the given words which go
decide which words go with SINCE or FOR with Since or for
1990 Monday the -give explanation for them
age of five
Three months many years
Last week
2005 Last Summer a
long time two hours - Ss work individually and compare
PRONUNCIATION their answer with a peer
Activity 1:Table completion -Ss read them in front of class
-T gives the words and asks Ss to put /ei/ /ai/ /oi/
them in tie right column/ei/ ,/ai/, /oi/ day Wildlife Enjoy
Wildlife enjoy day Demonstrati style noise
style on Buy destroy
Demonstration place toy Afraid airline toy
fly Paper climb
Afraid time climb Place fly
destroy railway height
Paper noise railway play lie
height
Buy airline play lie
-Help Ss to distinguish thses three -Ss retell the form and use the
sounds present perfect
-Instructs the way to pronounce them -Ss go to the blackboard and write
-Ask the whole class listen and repeat them down
them in chorus -While the others give another
Activity 2:Practise the sentences ideas
GRAMMAR: -Ss can give another examples
Activity 1: Review the present -Ss work individually and do
perfect exercise 1
1.Examples -read their answers in front of
We have just finished lesson 7 for 45 class
minutes
We have not finished lesson 7 for 45
minutes
Have you finished lesson 7 for 45
minutes?
2.Form : S+have/ has + V(3) - The whole class listen to T’s
S+ have/ has +not+V(3) guidance
Have / has + S+ V(3) ? -Combine two pairs of sentences
Adv: for / since -Expected answer:
Already/ not /yet/ never/ ever...... 1.Mary looks happy because she
3.use: express an action happened in has just get good marks
the past and still last in the present and -> Mary looks happy because of
future having just get good marks
4.Practice : Ask Ss to do exercise 1,2 2.Although he is very wealthy,he
Activity 2: Because and although isnot happy.
1.Examples: -> In spite of being very
a.Mary looks happy. She has just get wealthy,he isnot happy.
good marks
->
b.He is very wealthy. He is not happy
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page79 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
-> -Work individually and read their
2.Form answers in front of class
a.Clause and phrase of reason:
because + S+V-> because of + noun/ V-
ing
b.Clause and phrase of concession:
Athough Despite
Even though + S+V-> in spite of + noun/
V-ing
Though
3. Practice :Ask Ss to do exercise 3
-Ask Ss to work individually andcomplete
the sentences using the information in
the box.
- Encourage Ss to give explanation and
transtale VietNamese meaning
-Have Ss compare their answers with a
friend.
-Call on some ss to read their completed
sentences.
-Feedback and give correct answers

4-Consolidation:- Summarize their main points


5-Homework - Practise exercise 1,2 and 3 again and carefully
- Prepare Lesson 1: READING

D.P:3/12/08 Period 43
D.T:05/12/08
UNIT 8:THE STORY OF MY VIILAGE
A.READING
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to understand the main content of the passage
and hold on some new words
II. TEACHING AIDS: Text book,…
III.PROCEDURE:

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page80 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking a student to rewrite the clauses and phrases from
T.
3- New lesson: lesson 1:READING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
Warm up: NETWORK
-Ask Ss to work in groupd of three or four
and make a list of words related to the Work in group
“country”. The group with the longest list
will be winner
Crop- harvest- farmers- plough-
COUNTRY cows- buffalo- mud- machine

PRE-READING
Activity 1: Picture description -Work in pairs
-Look at the pictures -Expected answer:
-have Ss work in pairs and discuss the 1.The farmers are harvesting the
questions in the book. crop
Call on some pairs to read their answer 2.They are working hard
aloud in front of class 3.It’s good crop/ bumper crop
-feedback and give correct answers: 4.Good farming methods , good
Activity 2: presenting vocabulary varities, modern technology
+ straw(n) = dry cut stalks of various used, people work hard
cereals: råm
+ mud(n) -> muddy(adj)= wet, soft soil: - Ss read through the passage
buìn and find out the newwords and
+ technical high school (n): træåìng give their meaning
trung hoüc KT - Write all new words based on
+ farming method(n): PP canh taïc the VietNamese meanings
+ brick house; house made of brick
+ thanks to(exp): nhåì vaìo
- T asks Ss to pronounce them loudly
- Rub out and remember
WHILE-READING -Listen to T's eliciting and do the
TASK1: MATCHING VOCABULARY: task 1
- Ask Ss to read the passage and match - Read their answers
the given words which all appear in it in -Expected answer:
A with their definitions in B 1b 2.d 3.a 4.e
-Encourage Ss to guess the meaning of 5c
the words in the context -Give VietNamese equivalent :
-Have ss compare their naswers with a 1
peer. 2
-Call on some ss to explain their answers 3
in front of class 4.
-Feedback and give correct answers: 5.
TAÏSK2: TABLE COMPLETION - Work individually and pair work
-Ask Ss to scan the passage to get -Expected answer:
specific information to complete the Areas of Before Now
table change
-Let ss to study the table carefully before houses Made of Made of
doing the task straw bricks
-Go around the class and provide help and mud
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page81 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
when necessary Radio Few Many
- Tell Ss to discuss the answers with a and TV families
friend Farming old New
-Check the answers in front of class methods
-Give the correct answers crops poor Good/
TASK3: ANSWERING QUESTIONS bumper
-Get Ss to work in pairs : Read the travel no By
passage again and answer the questions motobik
in task 3 e
- Tell Ss to underline the information that - The reprentative of each group
suport the answers stand and present their group’s
-Call on some Ss to practise loudly ideas
- Give feedback and give correct -Expected answer:
answers: + introduce new farming
POST -READING methods
-Ask Ss to work in groups and discuss the + grow cash crops for export
questions + help local people apply
“ How can people with an education modern technology in farming
help make the life their community + Raise people’s awareness
better?” about foor safety and
- Go to groups and provide help when environmental hygien..
necessary

IV-Consolidation:- Retell the changes in your own hometown or home


village
V-Homework - Learn new words by heart
- Prepare Lesson 2: SPEAKING

D.P:08/12/08 Period 44
D.T:15/12/08
UNIT 8:THE STORY OF MY VIILAGE
B. SPEAKING
A.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to talk about the plans to to improve the
village
B.PROCEDURE:

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page82 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
I-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
II-Checking: Asking a student to read the passage and answer T’s
questions
III- New lesson: lesson 2:SPEAKING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
WARMER:Brainstorming Roads
T asks Ss to close your textbook and crop
make a list of the ideas that can be s
carried out to improve the village life
- Encourage ss to have ideas of their own medical
PRE-SPEAKING centre Improvement
Activity 2: TASK1:Matching Of the village
-Ask Ss to open their books and look at houses
the situation in Task 1
“The village of Ha Xuyen are discussing
plans to improve life in the village “Match bridges schools
the plans with possible results.
-Explain some new words:
+ resurface(v) =renew, put new surface
on -Work in pairs by practising the
+ cannal(n) =man made waterway for model
irrigation - Some pairs practise loudly
+ muddy(adj) full of mud -Expected answer:
-Have Ss do the task in pairs . Tell Ss to 1.B 2.G 3.D
give explanation following the model 4.E 5.F 6.C
A: Why should we widen the roads?
B:We should we widen them so that
cars and lorries can get to the
village
PRACTICE:
-Ask Ss to work in groups of three: Read -Work in groups of three
and practise the conversation - Talk aboput the plans and
-Call on some groups to practise the possible results in the village
conversation in front of class - Practse it in front of class
- T elicits Conditional sentences type 1:
If S + V(present) + S+ will/ can + V(bare- - Listen to T's eliciting and copy
infinitive) down

Ex: If the roads are widened , cars and


lorries can get to our village
- T provides some useful language:
*Giving agreement :
I think that we should.......
That’s a good ideas
I think so. We should
I completedly agree with you
PRODUCTION: Conversation
completion -Work in groups again and
A:I/ think/ we/ build/ football ground complete the conversation by
B:I /completely/ agree with you. If /it/ using the given words from T
built/ young people/play sports/ improve/ - Practise it in groups again
health.
C: A football ground/ a place/ where/
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page83 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
people meet/ exchane ideas.
A: What about/ medical centre? I/ think/
necessary/ built/it.
B:That’s a good ides. If/ it /built/ people’s
health/ looked after/ better.
C:Yes, and If/ we/sick. We/ not/have
/go/district/ provincial hospital/for
treatment.

IV-Consolidation:- Retell the plans and results in your village


V-Homework - Learn vocabularies by heart
- Prepare Lesson 3: LISTENING

D.P:09/12/08 Period 45
D.T:15/12/08 Day bu
UNIT 8:THE STORY OF MY VIILAGE
C. LISTENING
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to listen and understand the information about
changes in a small town.

II. TEACHING AIDS: Text book


III.PROCEDURE:
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page84 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
I-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
II-Checking: Asking a student to tell about the plans to improve your
village in future.
III- New lesson: lesson 3:LISTENING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
WARMER: Find someone who
Did you use to........? Name -Work in groups of four
1.have a favourite toy when - Ss go around the class and ask
you wrer a child the other.Then complete their
2.have a nickname? name.
3.have a pet? - Report results in front of class
4.cry at night when you
were a child?
5.hate school?
6.hate doing homework
7.play hide and seek?
PRE-LISTENING
Activity 1: Pictures description -Work individually
- T asks Ss to look at two pictures in the - Give their ideas about the
text book and talk about the differences pictures
between them in the past and nowadays In the past nowadays
- Call on some Ss to share their findings -No cars, There is a
in front of class. hotels hotel in the
- T gives the comments and writes them town.
on the board - small houses Tall buidings
-buffalos on No cows,
the roads and buffalos
cows grazing - the roads are
so the roads widen, bigger,
are dirty clearner
-the roads are
WHILE-LISTENING narrow.
TASK1:True Or False -a lot of trees -no trees
-Before listening to the tape, T asks Ss to
read all staterments carefully and
understand them. -The whole class
- play the tape several times if necessary -Ss read the staterment and
-have Ss compare their answers with a guess they are true or false
friend and correct the false ones - Stand up and speak loudly
-Call on some ss to read their naswer -Expected answer:
aloud 1.F(It ‘s on the south coast of
-Feedback and give correct answers: England)
2.F( It used to be a small quite
town)
3.T
4.F( A lot of trees have been cut
down for wider streets)
TASK2:Gap-filling 5.F( Some people don’t like the
-Tell ss to read a part of thetalk carefull changes , theymiss the quiet and
and have a guess of the missing words. peaceful life of the town)
- Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and fill
the gaps with the words they hear. -Work individually and compare
-Play the tape more than once if their answer with a peer.
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page85 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
necessary - Expected answer:
- Call on some Ss to read their answers 1.houses 2.hotel
-Feedback and give correct answers: 3.widened 4.cut
POST-LISTENING 5.car 6.shop
Work in groups:Discuss about the 7.department 8.expensive
changes in your own hometown or home
village
Useful structures:
+ Used to -Work in group
+ There is/ are used to - present their ideas’ groups in
+ there didn’t use to front of class.
+ have /has done /been done.....
- Have Ss work in group and talk about
the changes in your own hometown or
home village
- Call on some Ss to present their ideas’
groups in front of class.
-Listen their comments and correct
mistakes

IV-Consolidation:- Retell the changes in your own hometown or home


village
V-Homework - Learn new words by heart
- Prepare Lesson 4: WRITING

D.P:09/12/08 Period 46
D.T:15/12/08 dạy bu
UNIT 8:THE STORY OF MY VIILAGE
D. WRITING
I.OBJECTIVES:
- By the end of this lesson, Ss will able to write a letter giving directions.
Improve writing skill
II.TEACHING AIDS: Text book
III.PROCEDURE:
I-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
II-Checking: Asking a student to tell about the changes in your own
hometown
III- New lesson: lesson 4:WRITING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page86 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
WARMER:Asking the questions -Some Ss answer T’s questions
1.Where is your house?
2.Could you tell me the way to your
house?
PRESENTATION
TASK 1: Reading the letter -The whole class read the letter
- T introduces the situation and asks Ss -Find Ann’s house on the map
to work in pairs .Find Ann’s house on the -give directions ans some
map by reading letter. expressions
-Note: Ss can draw the directions while
discussing
-Ask them to read the letter again and
give directions.
-T provides some useful expression about -Listen to T's eliciting and copy
directions down
* Asking for directions:
+Could you tell me the way
to ....................?
+ Can you show me how to get
to ..................?
* Answering for directions:
+ turn left/ right
+ come out of
+keeping walking/ riding/ driving
+ go over/ pass/ walk past/go through
+ take the first /second/third turning.
+turning on the left/ right -Work in pairs
+ It’s opposite/ near/ next to/ in front of -Ask and answer about directions
TASK2: Asking and answering about on the map in order to find
directions on the map where the bookshop , sourvenir
-T asks Ss to work in pairs .Ask and shop.
answer about directions on the map in
order to find where the bookshop ,
sourvenir shop.
- T goes aroung and help them
-Call some pairs to practise in pairs aloud -Work individually and pair work
- Listen and correct errors - Exchange their writing into
PRODUCTION another friend
TASK3 Writing a letter giving - Correct their mistake from T
directions
- T asks Ss to read the requirement in
task 3and explain it
- Ask Ss to write independently and go
around the class , provide help when
necessary
-Have Ss compare their writing with a
peer
- Peer correction
-Pick up some writing and correct in front
of class
-Feedback and give correct answers:

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page87 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10

IV-Consolidation:- Summarize their main points


V-Homework - Write a letter completetly
- Prepare Lesson 5: LANGUAGE FOCUS

D.P:09/12/08 Period 47
D.T:15/12/08 Dạy bù
UNIT 8:THE STORY OF MY VIILAGE
D. LANGUAGE FOCUS
IOBJECTIVES:
I-Knowledge: Distinguish two sounds/əu/ and /ou/
Review the conditional sentence type I and Reported speech with
statement
II-Skill : Practising skill
II. TEACHING AIDS
III. PROCEDURE
I-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
II-Checking: Asking Ss about tenses that you learnt
III- New lesson: lesson 5:LANGUAGE FOCUS
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page88 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
WARMER: Jumpled sentences - The whole class
- T asks Ss to arrange given words into a - Some Ss read their
meaning sentence answers aloud
1.counted/ coming/ cows/ mountain/the/ Mr -Expected answer:
brown / down. 1A 2.B 3.D
->Mr Brown counted cows coming down the 4.B
mounted
2.knows/ Joe/ Rose/ phones/ Sophie/ Sophie/
and Joe/ but/ don’t know/ knows/ Rose.
-> Rose knows Joe phones Sophie, but Sophie
and Joe don’t know Rose knows. -Ss distinguish two sounds
PRONUNCIATION /əu and /ou/ and listen to T’s elicit
-T helps Ss to distinguish two sounds - Listen and repeat the
*/əu/ ->/a/ and /u/ words in ther textbook
*/ou/->/o/and /u/ Note :minimal pairs
-Ask them to listen and repeat several times /əu/ /ou/
2.Practice: Cow Coat
-Open their textbooks and practise the House Bowl
sentences Town Phone
-Calls on some Ss to pronounce two sounds Mouse Note
- Peer correction Couch Bone
GRAMMAR: How Close
I-REPORTED SPEECH WITH STATEMENTS
1 Examples:
a.I say, “ You have to work harder, Nam” - Listen to T's eliciting and
-> I say to Nam that he has to work harder change into reported speech
b.I said, “ You have to work harder, Nam” -compare two senteces and
-> I said to Nam that he hadto work harder give the forms
2. Eliciting: Direct -> indirect speech - Give explanation of the
* say , tell in the present : no change tense of way
verb in reported clause - practise exercise 1, 2 in
*say , tell in the past : + change tenses of their textbook
verb by moving “one tense back” Note: say ( to s.o)that
+ change pronouns : S, tell s.o
O and possesive adj talk to s.o
+ change adv of time
and place
3. Practice: Ask Ss to do exercise 1,2 - Work individually
-T asks Ss to do exercise 1,2 in their text book - Ss read loud their answers
-Call on some ss to read their completed in front of class
sentences. - The others listen and
-Feedback and give correct answers: correct mistakes
II- CONDITIONAL SENTENCES:
1.Examples: - Listen to T's eliciting amd
T: What will you do if you have a lot of money? copy down
S: If I have a lot of money, I will buy a new - Give the form and use
bicycle
2.Form and use
- T elicits Conditional sentences type 1:
If S + V(present) + S+ will/ can + V(bare-
infinitive)
- To express Sthing that can happen in future - Work individually
Note: Unless= If......not - Ss read loud their answers
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page89 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
3.Distinguish : When -clause & If- clause in front of class
When -clause : refers to “ all time” , not just - The others listen and
the present or future . They express a correct mistakes
situation that is always true. It means
whenever
Ex: When winner comes, It ‘ll be very cold
4.Practice : Ask Ss to do exercise 3,4
-T asks Ss to do exercise 3, 4 in their text book
-Call on some ss to read their completed
sentences.
-Feedback and give correct answers:

IV-Consolidation:- Summarize the main points of grammar in lesson


V-Homework - Do all exercises again and do more in workbook
- Prepare TEST YOUR SELF C

D.P:14/12/08 Period:48
D.T:16/12/08

TEST YOURSELF C
A.OBJECTIVES:
I-Knowledge: Helping Ss test their knowledge that you learnt in unit 7,8
II-Skill : Four skills
B.PROCEDURE:
I-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
II-Checking: Asking Ss to answer about grammar
III- New lesson: TEST YOUR SELF C
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page90 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
WARMER:Answering questions - The whole class retell what they
-T asks Ss to answer the questions have learnt from U4-U6
1.What have you learnt about grammar
and topic:Entertainment?
2.What are they?
PRESENTATION:
I-LISTENING:
A-TRUE OR FALSE -Work individually
-T asks Ss to look through the - Listen and decide if they are
staterments and understand them in 3 true or false
minutes -Some Ss read their answers to
- T helps Ss to guess they are true or the class and give their
false explanation
-T plays the tape twice and calls some Ss -Expected answer:
to give answers A-1.F( Sheila lives in a small
-Feedback and give correct answers: village called Henfield)
B-GAP- FILLING 2.F(You never have to queue..)
-Listen again and fill each blank with the 3.T
word you hear. 4.F(There is not much heavy
traffic)
5.T
II-READING: B-1.arenot 2.evenings
Reading the passage and answering the 3.cinemas
questions below 4.theatres 5.knows
-Work in pairs and practise them - Work in pairs and then
-T asks Ss to read five questions first and exchange their answers with
understand them carefully another pairs
- Go back to the passage and find its -Expected answer:
location .Then give their answers 1.Because people don’t have to
-T goes around the class and encourages go out to watch TV. They don’t
help if necessary. have to pay for expensive seats t
-T explains some newwords if necessary the theatres and in the
-T calls some Ss to give answers cinema.And there is no transfort
III-GRAMMAR:GAP -FILLING to arrange.
-T can explain how to do the exercise in 2.They can see plays, films of
grammar every kind, political discussions
- One word is missing from each line . Fill and football matches.
in each blank with the correct form of a 3.Because they need to do
verb in the box. nothing. They don’t even use
-Let them have 5 minutes to practise and their legs and make no choice.
encourage them to compare their Everything is presented to them.
answers with a peer. -Work in pairs
-T calls some Ss to give answers in front - Listen to T's eliciting and work
of the class. individually
-Feedback and give correct answers: --Expected answer:
1.have been/ hadn’t had
2.havenot given/ have paid
3.said
4.had taken
5.thought/ would come
IV-WRITING:Writing a letter about 6.told /have got
directions
-T guides Ss to retell how to write a letter
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page91 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
about directions ( how many parts, -Work individually
form,content.........) -Look at the map in the book and
-T asks Ss to to work individually and write a letter about direction for
peer correction your friend
- T calls 2 Ss to go to the blackboard and - After finshing , Two Ss go to the
write down your writing . board and write them down.
- T checks and corrects their mistakes

IV-Consolidation:- Retell all grammatical points from U7 to U8.


V-Homework - Do all exercises again and do more in workbook
- Prepare REVIEW

D.P:15/12/08 Period:49
D.T:18/12/08

REVIEW
A.OBJECTIVES
I-Knowledge: Helping Ss revise the grammatical points from U1 to U8.
II-Skill : Four skills
B.PROCEDURE:
I-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
II-Checking: Asking Ss to answer about grammar
III- New lesson: REVIEW: TENSES & PASSIVE VOICE
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page92 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
Warmer: BINGO - Listen to T and write them , then
-T asks Ss to work in group of eight give the past and PP form of
-Ss listen to write on a small paper and them
give the Past and Past participle form of
thses verbs
Mak finis
e h
go Leav
e
run See
Play
learn -Work individually
PRESENTATION - Listen to T’s instruction and
-T asks Ss to give the form of tenses that complete the table the form of
students have learnt. active and passive verbs
-Complete in the table -Give the other wexamles to
Tenses Active Passive illutrate
Simple S+V(e,e S+is/am/are+Vpp Some Ss read their answers to
present s) the class and give their
Present S+is S+is/am/are+being explanation
continuo /am/are +Vpp
us +
V-ing
Past S+Ved/V S+was/were+Vpp
Simple 2
Example:
1.They have provided the victims with food
and clothing
-> The victims have been provided
with food and clothing
2.People speak English in almost
everycorner of the world.
->English are spoken in almost
everycorner of the world.
PRACTICE:
I .VERB FORM -Ss work individually
1.We ( finish) our dinner half an hour ago. -Give the correct form of tenses
2.How many times you (see)him since he of verbs in parentheses
went to Edinburgh.
3.The farmers (work) in the field now. Expected answer:
4.Rivers usually (flow) to the sea. 1.finished 2.have you
5.Mrs Green always (go) to work by bus. seen
6.She (sit) under a tress when it began to 3.are working 4.flow
rain. 5.goes 6.was sitting
7.She said she (forget) something at home 7.had forgot 8.see/
yesterday. willremind
8.When we (see) Mr Taylor tomorrow, I
(remind) him of that.
II-MULTIPLE CHOICE Expected answer:
1.Jack ..............me that he was enjoying 1.told
his new class. 2.have been –were
a. told b.said c.talked 3.help
4.havemany
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page93 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
d.asked 5.works
2.We..............friends since we........ at
college together.
a.have been-were b.were- have been
c.were-were d.had- been
3.If you..............me with this exercise ,I will
do the same for you one day.
a.helped b.would help c.help
d.will help Expected answer:
4.The English ..............good traditions 1.has been
a.have much b.have many c.has much 2.would not
d.has many 3.since
5.If he .............., the results will be better 4.have seen
a. worked b.works c.has worked
d.will work
III-MISTAKE CORRECTION
1.Mary is living in LonDon. She have been
there for 12 years.
2.If Sarah knew you were here, she
willnot go out
3.I have lived in a small house near the
coast for 1990.
4.I see this film three times up to now.
IV-Consolidation:- Retell all grammatical points from U7 to U8.
V-Homework - Do all exercises again and do more in workbook
- Prepare REVIEW: STRUCTURES

D.P: 20/12/08 Period:50


D.T:22/12/08

REVIEW
A.OBJECTIVES:
I-Knowledge: Helping Ss revise the grammatical points from U1 to U8.
II-Skill : Four skills
B.PROCEDURE:
I-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
II-Checking: Asking Ss to answer about grammar
III- New lesson: REVIEW: STRUCTURES
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page94 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
WARMER:Find someone who...... -The whole class make questions
Did you use to........? Name for friends fine someone who
have a favourite toy when you used to..
were a child? If the answer is”yes” , you write
have a nickname? his/her name in the column
cry at night when you were a
child?
hate school?
play hide andseek?
have a pet?
PRESENTATION
I SENTENCE TRANSFORMATION
-T asks Ss to rewrite each sentence, -Work individually
beginning as shown , so that the mening -Expected answer:
stays the same. 1.She has been playing the piano
1.She began to play the piano 3 years ago. 3 years ago
- 2.He no longer plays tennis
>She .............................................................. He used to play tennis
........ 3.We have been invited to John
2.He doesn’t play tennis any longer party tonight
->He 4.Sharah got lost which made
used............................................................. her parents very worried.
3.John has invited us to his party tonight. 5.In spite of being poor, the
->We............................................................. children was poor.
4.Sharah got lost and this made her parents 6.Look at these clouds! It’s going
very worried. to rain on the way.
->Sharah got 7.Because of working harder, he
lost .............................................. will pass the exam
5.Although the children was poor, they were -Ss give their comment s about
happy. the structures of sentences
->In spite -Ss speak loudly and explanation
of.............................................................
6.Look at these louds !There ‘s no rains on
the way.
-> Look at these clouds!
It’s ...................................
7.Because he works harder, he will pass the
exam.
-> Because
of..........................................................
II-FORM :
1.S+ began /started + V-ing /to-
inf................ago -Ss work individually and
->S+has/have/+(been)+ compare their answer with a
Ving/Ved..............since/for friend
2.Not.....any more/any longer -Ss give the correct answers
-> No longer/ used to + V-inf -Expected answer:
3.Relative pronoun: replace the clause 1.to staying
preceding 2.In spite of
4.Although In spite of 3.which
Though +S+V-> Despite + 4.was replaced
N/Ving 5.If
6.whom
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page95 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
Even though 7.because
5.Because + S+V -> because of + N/Ving 8.In spite of
6.Used to + bare inf
Be used to + Ving
Be used to + Infinitive
Be used for + V-ing
III-MISTAKE CORRECTION
1.I’m tired because I’m not used to stay up
late
2.Even though the extremely bad weather
in the mountains, my friend decided not to
cancel their trip across the mountain pass.
3.My car, that I have owned for five years ,
is a Ford.
4.If a drop of oil is placed in a glass of
water, it would float to the top.
5.Unless we work harder, we will finish on
time
6.Is this the person whose you asked me
about?
7.Lan was absent from class yesterday
because of she was ill.
8.Although his illness , he managed to
come to school

IV-Consolidation:- Retell all grammatical points from U7 to U8.


V-Homework - Do all exercises again and do more in workbook
- Prepare REVIEW: REPORTED SPEECH

D.P: 20/12/08 Period:51


D.T:23/12/08
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page96 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10

REVIEW
A.OBJECTIVES:
I-Knowledge: Helping Ss revise the grammatical points from U1 to U8.
II-Skill : Four skills
B.PROCEDURE:
I-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
II-Checking: Asking Ss to answer about grammar
III- New lesson: REVIEW: REPORTED SPEECH
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
PRESENTATION
1.Examples:
a.“I saw her on my wayto school -Ss retalk the ways to change
yesterday” he says to me directed speech into indirected
->He says to me he saw her on his way speech
to school yesterday. -Distinguish two sentences
b.“I saw her on my wayto school
yesterday” he said
-> He said he had seen her on herway to
school the day before
2.Eliciting:
*When verb: say tell in the present ,
present perfect or simple future, no -Listen to T’s eliciting
change tense of verb in the reported
clause
* When verb : say , tell in the past , we
change the tense of verb in the reported
clause( to move one tense back)
- change adv of time
- change pronouns , adj possessive for
suitably Ss work individually and then
PRACTICE : compare their answer with a
I.Change these following sentences friends
into reported Speech -Ss go to the board and write
1.” I’ll see you tomorrow” down
-> She said................................. -The others check and correct
2.” I met her about three months ago” mistakes
-> He told me................................. Note: * Change adv of time ,
3.” I must go out to post thisbetternow, place
Mum,” he said
-> He said ................................. Directed indirected
4.” If you want to lose weight , you speech speech
should eat less meat” Here There
-> The doctor advised Before Ago/earlier
her................................. Last week The week
5.” We cannot finish th etest in forty five Next week before
minutes” Now The next week
->They said................................. This Then
6.”My husband has gone on business” These That
-> Mary said ................................. Today Those
7.” I am doing a business couse now” Tomorrow That day
-> She told me................................. yesterday The next day

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page97 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
8.Mary said “ I canot go to the movie with The day before
you , John” The previous
-> Mary said................................. day
II.Mistake correction I He/she
1.At the interview, they asked me when You Me
can you start work. We They
2.She wanted to know whether I have My His/her
seen Paul recently Yours truly, My
3.I asked Sean how to pronounce his our Their
name? me Him/her
4.The teacher said to her students how
many people there were in their class.
5.He asked me how long had I been
waiting for him

IV-Consolidation:- Retell all grammatical points from U7 to U8.


V-Homework - Do all exercises again and do more in workbook
- Prepare REVIEW: CONDITIONAL SENTENCES

D.P: 23/12/08 Period:52


D.T:25/12/08

REVIEW
A.OBJECTIVE:
I-Knowledge: Helping Ss revise the grammatical points from U1 to U8.
II-Skill : Four skills

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page98 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
B.PROCEDUCE:
I-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
II-Checking: Asking Ss to answer about grammar
II- New lesson: REVIEW: CONDITIONAL SENTENCES
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES
1.Real conditional sentences -Ss listen and give out
a.Future possible examples
If + S+V(simple present), S+ will +V-bare inf
Ex: If I have money, I will
b.habitual buy new car.
If + S+V(simple present), S+ V(simple Ex: Ann usually walks to
present) school if she has enough
time
2.Present unreal conditional sentences Ex: If you went to the post
If + S+V(simple past), S+ would/could+V- office, I would meet you
bare inf
Be-> were Ex: If we hadn’t attended
3.Past unreal conditional sentences the course , we would have
If + S+V(past perfect), S+ would/could+have failed the exam
+Vpp

4.If clause -> unless -Ss pay attention to


* negative -> affirmative(main clause doesn’t structures
change) -Give more examples
Ex: If you don’t study hard, you’ll fail in the
exam
-> Unless you study hard, you’ll fail in the
exam
*Affirmative -> Affirmative ( Main clause ->
reverse)
Ex: If I have time . I’ll help you
-> Unless I have time , I won’t help you
5.As if and as though
* Real in present
S+V(present) + as if /as though
+S+V( present)
* Unreal in present
S+V(past) + as if /as though +S+V( past)
* Unreal in the past
S+V(past) + as if /as though +S+V( past
perfect)
PRACTICE
WORD FORM
1.If I (know )........his telephone number . I’d
give it to you
2.Hecould get a job easily if he (have ) ........ a
degree.
3.Henry talks to hisdog as if it
(understand ) ........ him
4.If she (not hurry) ........, she may be late
5.Water ( not run ) ........down hill if there

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page99 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
were not gravity
6.He looked tired as if he ( work ) ........very Ss work individually and
hard then compare their answer
7.If you ( turn ) ........out the light , we shall be with a friends
in the dark. -Ss go to the board and
8.He might get fat if he (stop) ........smoking write down
9.I ( accept) ........ if they invite me to the -The others check and
party correct mistaks
REWRITING SENTENCES:
1.Alan always ate breakfast , he wouldnot
overeat at lunch
->
If.......................................................................
......
2.The wind is blowing hard , so I won’t take
the boat out for a ride.
->
If.......................................................................
......
3.We don’t visit our parents very often
because they live so far away
->
If.......................................................................
......
4.I can’t look the word up because I havenot
got a dictionary.
->
If.......................................................................
......
5.Nick can’t find the way because he hasnot
got a map
->
If.......................................................................
......

IV-Consolidation: Ask Ss to retalk the grammatical points in this lesson


V-Homework -Do more exercises in work book
- Prepare REVIEW 5

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page100 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10

D.P: Period:53
D.T:

REVIEW
A.OBJECTIVE:
I-Knowledge: Helping Ss revise the grammatical points from U1 to U8.
II-Skill : Four skills
B.PROCEDUCE:
I-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
II-Checking: Asking Ss to answer about grammar
II- New lesson: REVIEW: EXERCISES
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
PRONUNCIATION
I -Choose the word whose underlined
part is pronounced differently from that Ss work individually and
of the others then compare their answer
1a.around b.mouse c.count with a friends
d.country -Ss go to the board and
2a.mechanic b.achievement c.chemistry write down
d.school -The others check and
3a.cut b.fun c.pull correct mistaks
d.button * Expected answer
4a.camera b.famous c.glad pronunciation
d.family 1.d 2.b 3.c
5a.seat b.leave c.increase 4.b 5d
d.ready 6.c 7.b 8.d
II-Stress: multiple choice
6a.computer b.important c.village 1.a 2.c
d.condition 3.c 4.b
7a.television b.community 5.b 6.b
c.atmosphere d.damage 7.c
8a.persuade b.relax c.research mistake correction
d.export 1.Even though-> Despite, In
MULTIPLE CHOICE spite of
1.Yesterday , when I ........at the station , the 2.Have -> Had
train........for 15 minutes 3.that-> which
a. arrived/ had left b.arrived /left 4.will completed->will
c.had arrived /left d.arrived/ has left complete
2.Would you mind........me hand with these 5.saw-> had seen
bags?
a. give b.to give c .giving d.to
giving
3.When I was a child I........fishing with my
father on Sunday morning.
a. went b.had gone c.used to go d. was
used to going

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page101 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
4.Marie Curie harboured the dream of a
........career which was impossible for a
woman at that time.
a. scientist b. scientific c. science d.
scientifically
5.This computer isnot capable ........running
this software.
a.on b.of c.in
d.for
6.Students for ........English is a secon
language should consider taking the course.
a. who b. whom c.that
d.whose
7.If I ........John tonight , I ........him my plans
a.saw/told b.will see/will tell
c.see/will tell d.will see/tell
MISTAKE CORRECTION
1.Even though the extremely bad weather
in the mountains , my friends decided not to
cancel their trip across the mountain pass
2.Have the play already started when you
got to the theater?
3.My car, that I have owned for five years,
is a Ford.
4.The installation of the new computer
systerm will completed by next month
5.She wanted to know if I saw Paul resently

IV-Consolidation: Ask Ss to retalk the grammatical points in this lesson


V-Homework -Do more exercises in work book
- Prepare THE FIRST SEMESTER TEST

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page102 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10

D.P:28/12/08 Period:55
D.T:05/01/09
UNIT 9: UNDERSEA WORLD
A. READING
I.OBJECTIVES:
- Helping Students get knowlegde about undersea world
-Use vocabulary items related to the undersea world to read and talk about the
topic
II.TEACHING AIDS: text book……
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: No
3- New lesson: Lesson 1: READING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
Warmer: Brainstorming - Ss work in groups of
-T asks Ss to give words that are related to the sea six and write the
and write into a small paper words related to the
- T calls on some Ss to write on the blackboard sea and write into a
shark small paper
- Write them on the
UNDER board
dolphin SEA
Fish

Seal
whale

Starfish - Work in group again


PRE-READING and write the names of
Activity 1: Names of the oceans on the map the oceans on the map
-T asks Ss to look at the map carefully and give the - Expected answer:
VietNamese names for the oceans on the map 1. Arctic Ocean:['ɑ:ktik]
- Work in groups of five 2.Antartic Ocean:
- The winner is the group who finds the correct [æn'tɑ:ktik]
answers in the shortest period of time 3.Pacific Ocean: [pə'sifik]
- Rub out and remember 4.Atlantic Ocean:
[ət'læntik]
Activity 2: Names of sea animals
5.Indian Ocean: ['indjən]
- T asks to give the VietNamese names of the
animals in the pictures
-Expected answer:
- Then T asks Ss for the English names of these
animals
1.Seal: [si:l]
-If Ss donot know them in English , T should provide
2.Jellyfish: ['dʒelifi∫]
them
3. Turtle: ['tə:tl]
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page103 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
Activity 3:Pre-teaching vocabulary 4.Shark: [∫ɑ:k]
+ Bay(n):
+ mystery(n): - Work individually
+ beneath(pre) [bi'ni:θ]: under st/sb : - Pronounce these
+Submarine: words in chorus
+ Marine: life in the sea: -Rub out and
+ fall into: to be able to be divided into sth: remember
+ water current (n):
+ organism(n) ['ɔ:gənizm]:
+ at stake : at risk : bi de doa
-T may delete the English words and asks Ss to write
them again
-Read them carefully - Work individually
WHILE READING - Expected answer:
TASK 1: GAP-FILLING 1.tiny
-Read the passage quickly and stop at the lines that 2.investigate
contain these words to guess their meanings 3.gulf
- Then read the sentences carefully to understand 4.biodiversity
and choose the most suitable one to fill in the blank. 5.samples
- T asks Ss to work individually to do the task
- T goes around to help Ss when necessary
- Encourage Ss to exchange their answers with other
Ss
- Tell them and explain their choices
TASK 2: ANSWERING QUESTION -Expected answer:
-T instructs Ss to use some strategies to do the task 1.three- quarters
- Go back the passage to find out the information for 2.mysterious
the questions 3.modern
- T asks Ss to work individually first and then discuss 4.discoveries
their answers with peers 5.biodiversity
- T calls on some Ss to write their answers on the 6.huge
board and ask them to explain their answers 7.plants and animals
-Feedback and give correct answers: 8.closely connected
POST READING :SUMMARY THE TEXT
-Complete the passage by filling each blank with the
word or phrase given in the box .
- Work in groups
4-Consolidation:- Summarize the main points of the text
5-Homework - Learn by heart vocabularies
- Prepare Lesson 2: SPEAKING

D.P:01/01/09 Period:56
D.T:06/01/09

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page104 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
UNIT 9: UNDERSEA WORLD
B. SPEAKING
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson Students will be able to
+ offer solutions to sea problems using should / shouldn’t
+ talk about causes and consequences of sea problems
+ report on discussion results
II.TEACHING AIDS: text book,picture
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Reading the passage and answering the questions without
textbook
3- New lesson: Lesson 2: SPEAKING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
Warmer: Pictures description
- Work in groups
- Picture 1 & 3:
Rubbish in the shore
-Picture 2: oil spill
- Ss speak their ideas
in front of class

-T asks Ss to work in groups to


discuss
1.What can you see in the pictures
- Before doing the
2.What problem is it?
task, Ss read through
PRESENTATION
the staterments and
TASK 1: OFFERING SOLUTIONS
understand them
- Work in pairs to put the actions in the order of
- Pronounce the
importance and then say what we should or should
newwords
not do
- give the Vietnamese
- Before the task , T asks Ss to read through the
meaning of them
actions
- Ss represent their
- Elicits vocabulary
ideas about problems
+ to place= to put
a.we should
+ sparingly (adv)
b.we should
+ to threaten (v) = endanger(v)
c.we should
+ herbicide(v) thuoâc dieât coû
d.we should not
+ to dispose of(v): loai bỏ
e.we should not
+ pesticide (n): thuốc saâu
f.we should
* In your opinion, which action should you do to
g.we should
protect oceans at first?
h.we should
* which action should not you do
- T goes around and help them if necessary
-work in group and
- T asks Ss to reprsent their answers
discuss the
TASK2: DISCUSSING CONSEQUENCES AND
consequences that
OFFERING SOLUTIONS
might occur and offer
-T asks Ss to work in groups and discuss the
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page105 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
consequences that might occur and offer solutions solutions
- Useful expressions -Ss write simple ideas
+ to make sth/ sb + adj : this makes the ocean into the box
polluted - Give more other
+ to result in +N: Over-fishing results in the consequences and
extinction of some fish species solutions
+ to cause: Oil spills cause ocean pollution Example:
- T might give the handout to help them in A: Beaches are filled
discussing with plastic bags ,
Threats consequence solutions pieces of glass and
s cigarette butts .This
1.beaches filled Polluted water Place plastic makes the sea
with plastic bags in proper polluted and endanges
bags dusbins sea plants and
2.whales and Extinct/ Don’t let animals
hurnted for disappear people sell B. We should clean
food whale products beaches and tell other
3.Explossives Polluted water Be banned people not to litter
used to catch them.
fish
4.oil spilled Polluted water Punish captain
from tankers -Report their result of
POST-SPEAKING their group
TASK3: REPORTING THE RESULTS - The others listen and
- T calls on the representative of each group will supply more ideas
present their group’s ideas in front of class
- T listens their comments and gives feedback

4-Consolidation:- Summarize the main points of the text


5-Homework - Talking about the consequences and solutions of sea
problems
- Prepare Lesson 3: LISTENING

D.P:01/01/09 Period:57
D.T:08/01/09
UNIT 9: UNDERSEA WORLD
C. LISTENING
I.OBJECTIVES:
I-Knowledge: Helping Ss get information about sea animals
II-Skill : Listening skill
II.TEACHING AIDS: cassette player
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page106 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Talking about threats , consequences and solutions of
oceans
3- New lesson: Lesson 3: LISTENING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
WARMER: Answering the questions
-T asks Ss to look at the picture and answerT’s
questions first

The whole class look


at the pictures and
answer Qs
1.Do you think whales are fish?Why not? + They are not fish
2.Why do people keep hunting for whales? because they raise
their young on milk
+ Because they catch
whales for food , oil
PRE-LISTENING ,leather and other
Activity 1:Vocabulary products
-Before eliciting some newwords, T helps Ss to
pronounce the words given in the book. -Work individually
-T read aloud first and ask Ss to repeat in chorus - Speak aoud the
and individually newwords and elicit
+to keep+V-ing: ther meaning
Ex: We keep working hard in this course - Guess what topic you
+ krill(n) :nhuyãùn thãø will listen today
+ whaling(n) hunting for whales: sàn caï voi
+to migrate(v) to move from one habitant to
another according to the seasons: di cæ
+conservation(n) : sæû baïo täön
WHILE-LISTENING
TASK1:TRUE OR FALSE STATEMENTS
-T instructs Ss to listen to a passage about the - Work individually
whales.Listen and decide whether the staterments - Read all statements
provided are true or false. to understand and
-Before listening , T asks Ss to read all statements to underline key words.
understand and underline key words. - Expected answer:
-Play the tape three times 1.F( it is the largest
-Call on some Ss to answer animal)
-Feedback 2.T
3T
4F(because of heavy
TASK2: ANSWERING QUESTIONS hunting pressure)
- You are going tolisten to the tape again to answer 5.T
the question in the textbook -Work in pairs
-Ss read through the questions and underline key -Guess the answers
words. first
-Listen to the tape
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page107 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
-Guess the answers to the question based on the again and answer the
previous times of listening questions
- Play the tape again -Expected answer:
- T asks Ss to work in pairs to exchange answers 1.30 metres in
- T checks their answers lengthand 200 tons in
POST-LISTENING weight
-Work in groups to talk about whales using the 2.Because there are a
cues provided lot of krill
+ their length and weight 3.Cold waters in the
+their feeding grounds and food North and South
+the reasons for protecting whales Atlantic Ocean and the
-T goes around to offer help Noth and south Pacific
-T asks some Ss to give a talk about whales are their favourite
- Feedback and give correct answers: feeding grounds
4.Heavy hunting
5.to stop most whaling
6.Whales disappear
forever

4-Consolidation:- Summarize the main points of the text


5-Homework - Talking about the information of whales and write a short
paragraph
-Learn by heart new words
- Prepare Lesson 4: WRITING

D.P:02/01/09 Period:58
D.T:
UNIT 9: UNDERSEA WORLD
D. WRITING
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to write a descriptive paragraph about
dolphins by using the facts and figures from table
II.TEACHING AIDS: text book
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Talking about information of whales from listening
3- New lesson: Lesson 4: WRITING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page108 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
WARMER:Brainstorming -Work in groups of 8
-T divides the whole class into 8 -Write the words that are related to
groups the words “ dolphin”
-In 3 minutes , Ss write many piecies + Length and weight
of information about dolphins as + their food and feeding grounds
possible + populations
-The group with the most details will + reasons for protecting
be winner

Dolphin
-Work individually
PRESENTATION -Give the VietNamese meaning of the
TASK1:Exploiting the model words from the paragraph
1.Vocabulary -Read them carefully
-T elicits some newwords that appear
in the text or in the table
+ sperm whale(n) caù nhaø taùng
+ squid(n) :möïc
+ gestation(n) : thôøi kì thai
ngheùn
+ entrapment(n) :bò mace baãy
+habitant(n) :moâi tröôøng
soáng
+offspring(n)= a child , the young of -Ss format the paragraph by asking
an animal the teacher
+ Life span(n)= the length of time -Work individually
that sth is likely to live: tuäúi thoü

2.Format of a descriptive
paragraph
+ Topic sentence: what you want to -Work in pairs and complete the table
derscribe about
( provides the name of sthing you are SPERM WHALE
going to write about and its most Range& All oceans
remarkable feature) habit Prefer waters with high
+ the other sentences : describe the squid populations
sthing’s details Size Male:18m in length :
+the last sentence: problems , 54,000kg in weight
concerns and people and you want to Female:12m. 17,000 kg
write Feeding Carnivores :eat mainly
3.Filling in the table habits squid.Eat up to 1500 kg
-T asks Ss to read the paragraph of food daily
carefuly and complete the Offspring Give birth to one calf
information in the table every 5-7
-T gets ss to exchange with another years.Gestation period :
peer 14-19months
-T checks Ss answers by asking some Life span Up to 60-70 years
Ss to go to the board to write their Special Biggest animals that
answers features have teeth on
-Feedback and give correct answers: Earth.Have the largest
4 TASK2:Writing : brain of all mammals
-T asks Ss to write the topic sentence
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page109 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
for the paragraph Conversati At risk due to hunting
-T checks their topic sentences nd on and accidental fishing
provide feedback and give correct concerns net entrapment
answers:back
- Then ask Ss to write the paragraphs
: remind them to refer to the model
paragraph in task 1
-While Ss write , T goes around to
observer and provide help.
-If Ss find it difficult, T may ask them
to write sentence by sentence and
combine them later
POST-WRTING
- T asks Ss to exchange their
paragraph with another student for
peer correction
-Collects mistakes and errors
-T gives general cooments

4-Consolidation:- Summarize the main points of the text


5-Homework - Rewrite a a descriptive paragraph
-Learn by heart newwords
- Prepare Lesson 5: LANGUAGE FOCUS

D.P:02/01/09 Period:59
D.T:
UNIT 9: UNDERSEA WORLD
E. LANGUAGE FOCUS
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to distinguish the sounds/i /and /u /
- Grammar: should or shouldn’t andconditional type 2
II.TEACHING AIDS: Text book, cassette player
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Talking about information of whales from listening
3- New lesson: Lesson 5: LANGUAGE FOCUS
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page110 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
PRONUNCIATION:
Activity 1
*Examples: -Distinguish the sounds
Bear meat fear sure -Repeat after T
pure -Practise the sentences
/ea/ /i:/ /i / /u /
/u /
-Help Ss to distinguish these the sounds
-Instructs the way to pronounce them
-Ask the whole class listen and repeat them in
chorus -Listen to T’s eliciting and
Activity 2:Practise the sentences copy down
Grammar: - Do exercise 1&2 in the
I-SHOULD and SHOULDNOT textbook
1.Examples:
a.She looks tired.->She should go to bed
b.Peter has got avery bad cold-> He shouldnot
go out
2.Form:
SHOULD
SHOULDNOT V-(bare infinitive)
3.Meaning:
SHOULD do sth= It is a good thing
SHOULD not do sth= It isnot a good thing
4.Practice : do exercise 1&2 in the textbook
-T asks Ss to do exercise 1 &2
-T goes around and help them
- call on some Ss to write their answer on the -The whole class make the
board conditional sentences
-feedback - Give the form and uses
II-CONDITIONAL SENTENCE : TYPE2 - Practise exercise 3 in the
1.Example : textbook
a.Today peter is ill, he cannot go to the school -Expected answer:
-> If today Peter werenot ill, he would go to 1.didn’t go
school 2.would feel
b.She eats too much sugar, she is very fat 3.would take
->If she did not eat too much sugar, she 4.refused
wouldn’t be fat 5.wouldn’t let
2.Form: 6.closed down
If S+V(past subjunctive ) , S+ would/could + 7.pressed
V(bare infi) 8.would be
-> to express things or action that are unreal 9.didnot come
(not true or not possible) in the present or in the 10.borrowed
future 11.walked
Not : be ->were for all Subjects 12.would understand
3 Practice : do exercise 3(textbook)
Put the verbs into the correct form
PRODUCTION: Matching game
-T asks Ss to read the If-clause in the left column
and the main clause in the right column and
matching them
If clause Main clause
1.If I had a big house a.They would give the
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page111 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
2.If she didn’t est good marks
much sugar b.He would be fit
3.If he did morning c.I could invite many
exercises friends to my house
4.If the students d.She would be fat
worked harder

4-Consolidation:- Summarize the main points of the text


5-Homework - Review the conditional clauses
-Do exercise 1,2 and 3 again and do more in workbook
- Prepare Lesson 1: READING

D.P:01/02/09
D.T:02/02/09

UNIT 10: CONSEVATION


Period:60 A.READING
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of this leson Ss will be able to improve reading skills as scanning for
specific information about Conversation and guessing meaning in context
II.TEACHING AIDS: Text book, pictures
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Rewriting the conditional sentences
3- New lesson: Lesson 1: READING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page112 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
WARM UP: BRAINSTORMING
-T asks Ss to give some difficult problems
which people have all over the world(poverty, pollution
hungry, Aids, ..)
-T asks Ss to work in group by brainstorming
that related to environment Environmental
-T says : One of solutions about environmet is forest
“Consevation” floods problems
* What is consevation? fire
PRE-READING
Activity 1: Answer the questions
-Look at the pictures, and then answer the
questions: Answer: Consevation is the
1.Have you ever visited a zoo or a forest? protection of naturalthings ,
2.What animals are you interested in ? why? such as plants and animals
3.Do you need to protect animlas and forests? -Look at the pictures and
Why or why not? answer T’s questions
-T goes around and to provide help -Some Ss speak their ideas in
-T calls on some ss to answer the question in front of class
front of class
Activity 2:Present vocabulary
-T asks Ss toread through the passage and -Read through the passage
present vocabulary and find out the newwords
+ to destroy(v) end sth, kill sb/ sth -Give the VietNamese
-> destruction(n) sự phá hoại meaning
+ to play an important in Sth -Pronounce them aloud
+ to clean up (v) : to make sth clean and neat
+ to consever(v) to protect sth from harm
+ to pass law(exp)
-To worsen(v) to become worse
-T asks Ss to read these words aloud
-Rub out and remember
WHILE-READING
TASK1: MATCHING
-T asks Ss to amtch the word in column A with -The whole class
a suitable defition in column B -Read the passage and give
-T writes the words on the borad the part of speech of words in
- Call on some Ss to give the correct answer task1
-feedback - Match them with defition
TASK2: TRUE OR FALSE -Expected answer:
-T asks Ss to read the passage clearly and 1.C 2.A 3.D 4.B
decide if the staterments are ture or false
-Let them have 3 minutes to work in silent -Th e whole class read the
annd then encourage them to compare with a statements and decide if they
friend are true or fasle
- T calls on some Ss to give ther answer in front -Some Ss speak out their
of class answer and explanation
-Feeback -Asnwer:
TASK3:MAIN IDEAS FOR EACH 1.T(line2 ) 2.T(line 3-5)
PARAGRAPH 3.T(line11-12) 4.T(line15-16)
-Choose the most suitable main idea for each 5.F(line 11-12) 6.F
paragraph -Work in pairs
and get some evidents from the passage -Answer:
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page113 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
-Calls some ss to give the correct annswer and A-3 B-4 C-2
support ther explanation
POST-READING
Work in groups : Answer the questions
1.What is the consequence of losing forest? -Work in groups of 6
2.How important is water in our life?
3.What should we do for the future of our
planet?

4-Consolidation:- Summarize the main points of the text


5-Homework -Learn by heart newwords
- Prepare Lesson 2: SPEAKING

D.P:01/02/09
D.T:03/02/09

UNIT 10: CONSEVATION


Period:61 B.SPEAKING
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of this leson Ss will be able to talk about advantages and
disadvantages of the new kind of zoo
II.TEACHING AIDS:text book…
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Checking their new words
3- New lesson:Lesson 2: SPEAKING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
WARM UP:CATOGORIES
-Instruction: Below is the list of animals -Work in groups
.Classify them to the following catogories - Go to the blackboard and
Handout: write down quickly
Farm animals Wild animals Pets - Another Ss check and
correct
Horse, elephant, monkey, sheep, pig, hen, *Expected answer
tiger, graffe, snake, lion, cat, pirrot, tortoise, Farm Wild Pets
fish, panda, shinoceros... animals animals
Horse, Elephant, Cat,
sheep, monkey, parrot,
-Make questions and answer them pig, snake, fish
1.Have you ever been to the zoo? hen, lion,
2.What animals can you see in the zoo and in fish tortoise,
the wild? panda,
3.What are zoo opened for? shinocero
4.What animals are in danger? s
PRESENTATION -Listen and answer T’s
TASK1:Discussion questions
Instruction: You are required to work in pairs to
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page114 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
put the actions in the order of importance and
then say what we should or shouldnot do
-T reads through two paragraphd loudly
-presents vocabularies:
+sensitive(adj)quick to response to: nhaïy
caûm -Listen to T’s instruction
+Imprison(v) put or keep prison
+reconstruct(v) build again
+reintroduce(v)tha ûveà moâi tröôøng cuõ
+to be famous for (exp) -Work in pairs
-T asks Ss to answer Ss questions by *expected answer:
discussing the information in paragrapg A-B 1.They are opened to help
-Call on some Ss to give the correct answers endangered species develop
-Feedback 2.The animals are not kept in
TASK2: Agreement and disagreement cages .They can live in their
-T asks Ss to put a stick (v) in the right column natural environment
to show your agreement and dis agreement.
Then share your ideas with a partner.
-T asks to use structures to express someone’s -Listen and practise in pairs
opinion -Ask and answer as the model
*Useful language by using the useful language
+ Asking opinions:What do you think of.....?
Do you think.....?
Do you agree with.....?
+ Giving opinions: I think..... ..... .....
I don’t think..... ..... .....
In my opinion..... ..... .....
+Showing agreement: I agree with you
Yes, I think you are
right
Exactly
+ Showing disagreement:I don’t really think so
Yes, ..but..
I would doubt that
-T set the model
T:I think It would be better for animals if
they live in the zoo of the new kind because
they may have better food -Work in groups
S: I agree with you -Talk about advantages and
TASK3: Advantages and disdavantages disdavantages of the new
-T asks Ss to work in groups again to discuss kind of zoo using the cues
the advantages and disdavantages of the new -The representative of each
kind of zoo using the cues provided in the group will present their
textbook group’s ideas
-Then share group reports in front of the class
PRODUCTION : REPORTING

4-Consolidation:- Summarize the main points of the text


5-Homework -Learn by heart newwords
- Prepare Lesson 3: LISTENING

D.P:02/02/09

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page115 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
D.T:05/02/09

UNIT 10: CONSEVATION


Period:63 C. LISTENING
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to get specific information about
forest fires
-Improve listening skill
II.TEACHING AIDS: text book, cassette player
II.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking Ss to speak your ideas about a new kind of zoo
3- New lesson: Lesson 3: LISTENING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
WARM UP: NOUGHT and CROSSES -Ss work in pairs .One of the
-T puts a grid on the board with nine words students copies the grid in his
which Ss have learnt from the previous lessons /her book
Conserve Clean up Destroy -make sentences with these
imprison reintroduce Sensitive words
Hydroelectric worsen destruction If the sts is correct , she /he
PRE-LISTENING puts the mark “O” or “X” in
1.Discussion that square
-T asks Ss to work in groups to discuss what
may cause a forest fire.
-T calls on some Ss to present their answer
2.Present vocabulary -Work in groups
+ forester(n) a person in charge of a forest or
skilled in forestry The cause campfire
+ awful(adj) very bad or pleasant of forest fire butts of
+ to put out(v) :dập lửa burning
-T asks Ss to listen and repeat the given words cigarett
in the textbook es
WHILE-LISTENING lighting
TASK1: NUMBERING EVENTS
Instruction:You are going to listen to a passage -Give the meaning of these
about forest fire .Listen and number the events words
in the order you hear -pronounce them after T’s
-First, T asks Ss to read through the sentences eliciting
to understand what each of them is about
-Underline key words
-Then play the tape sothat Ss listen clearly
-Call on some Ss to give their answers -Listen to T’s eliciting
-Listen and give the correct answer -Work individually and then
TASK2: TRUE OR FALSE STATEMENTS compare their answer with a
-Now listen again and decide whether the peer
following statements are true or false -Expecetd answer:
-Before listening again , T asks Ss to read 3-2-5-1-4
through the sentences to underline words
-Play the tape again
--Call on some Ss to give their answers
-Listen and give the correct answer
-Read the sentences and

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page116 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
decide whether they are true
or false
- Give the correct answer and
TASK3: CHOOSE THE SENTENCES HEARD explanation
-T asks Ss to put a tick (v) in the appropriate - Pay attention to key words
box after listening again *Expected answer:
-Read through the sentences you understand 1F(It spreads quickly)
-Check and give feedback 2F( in late summer)
POST-LISTENING 3.T
Work in pairs : Say how a forest fire may start 4T
and what every camper ought to remember 5F( It is the duty of everyone
Student A: a journalist of us)
Student B:a forester -Read them silently
-Pay attention to the different
parts
-Give the correct answer
1.A 2.B 3.A

-Work in pairs
4-Consolidation:- Summarize the main points of the text
5-Homework -Learn by heart newwords
- Prepare Lesson 4: WRITING

D.P:02/02/09
D.T:09/02/09

UNIT 10: CONSEVATION


Period 63 D. WRITING
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to write a letter of invitation to a
friend
II.TEACHING AIDS: Text book….
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Talking about some causes of a forest fire
3- New lesson: Lesson 4: WRITING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
WARM-UP:Jumpled sentences -Work individually and speak
-T asks Ss to work individually and arrange out the sentence
these jumpled words into a meaningful -Give the VietNamese
sentence meaning of the words from
*Dinner/ evening/ for/ go/ like/ out/ this/ to/ the paragraph
you/ would? -Read them carefully
-> Would you like to go out this evening for
dinner?
*Ask some questions: -The whole class listen to T
1.What purpose of this question is it? and answer Qs
2.Have you written a letter of invitation ? On
which occasion?

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page117 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
3.What do you often write in a letter of
invitation?
4.What are some expressions do you write in
a letter of invitation?
PRESENTATION
TASK1:Matching -Listen to T's eliciting and
1.Vocabulary copy down
-T asks Ss to read the requirements to -Give another example
understand .Then match the first half in A with
the suitable half in B
-T writes their answers on the board and gives
any correction
-T gives the form of the verb in the structures
1.Let’s + bare infinitive.
2.Why don’t you/ we + bare infinitive?
3.Would you like + to- infinitive?
4.Do you feel like + V-ing?
5. Can you/ could you + bare
infinitive?
6.How about/ What about +V-ing?
7.Shall we + bare
infinitive? -Work individually
8.Are you free + to -infinitive? -Encourage Ss to exchange
9.I suggest + V-ing. their answers with another
Task 2: Letter completion peer
Instruction: You are required to fill each blank - Give correct answers
in thses invitation letters with a suitable 1.Are you free/ Would you
expression provide in task 1. For each blank like
you can have more than one answer. 2.Would you like/ Are you
- First T asks Ss to read through the letters to free
understand the content of them How about/ What about
-Pay attention to the form of the verb that 3.Can you / Why don’t you/
follows the blank and then find the suitable Shall we
expression to complete.
-T gets ss to exchange with another peer
-T checks Ss answers by asking some Ss to go
to the board to write their answers
-Feedback and give correct answers:
4 TASK3:Writing :
-T asks Ss to write an invitation in which Nam -Work individually
invites Lam to spend a weekend with him, -Peer-correction
using the cues provides.
-T reminds Ss that they sholud use all the
language items provides together with other
items to produce meaningful and
grammatically( tense of verbs, articles,
prepostion...) correct sentences
-T goes around and help them
-While Ss write , T goes around to observer and
provide help.
-If Ss find it difficult, T may ask them to write
sentence by sentence and combine them
later
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page118 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
POST-WRITING
- T asks Ss to exchange their paragraph with
another student for peer correction
-Collects mistakes and errors
-T gives general comments

4-Consolidation:- Summarize the main points of the text


5-Homework - Complete your letter at home
-Learn by heart the strutures
- Prepare Lesson 5: LANGUAGE FOCUS

D.P:04/02/09
D.T:10/02/09

UNIT 10: CONSEVATION


Period:64 E.LANGUAGE FOCUS
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to distinguish two sounds /b/&/p/, using
Passive Voice correctly
II.TEACHING AIDS: Text book, cassette player
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Checking their newwords
3- New lesson: Lesson5: LANGUAGE FOCUS
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
PRONUNCIATION The whole class listen and
Activity 1:Pronounce the two sounds repeat the words in their
separately textbooks.
-T models the two sounds twice or three times -Some Ss read them loudly
- T pronounces the sounds and asks Ss to -Practise the sentences
repeat individually
-T gives feedback
Note: p, b stand after m-> they are not
pronouced
Activity 2:Practise the sentences
-T reads the sentences and asks Ss underline
the words with the sounds and write/ b/or /p/
under them
-T asks Ss to practise the sentences in pairs - Work individually
-T goes aroung to provide help -Change the sentences into
GRAMMAR: PASSIVE VOICE passive voice
1.Examples: -Go to the board and write
-T asks Ss to change thses sentences into their answers
passive voice -Give feedback
a.My mother wrote this article yesterday. 1.This artice was writtenby
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page119 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
-> my mother yesterday
b.She can use English everyday. 2.English can be used by her
-> everyday
c.We have used this car for ages 3.This car has been used for
-> ages
2.Form and use:
a.Form: AV: S + V +O -Retell the form , use and
tenses in passive sentences.
PV: S be+past participle
by O

-T elicits the form and meaning , use of the


passive voice
-T revises the ways to change a active sentece
into a passive one -The whole class do exercise
+The passive can be used in various tenses 1,2,3
+ Meaning: Passive - Compare their answers with
+Use: express what happening , not who or a peer
what did it - Read their answers in front
3.Practice : do exercise 1 and2 in textbook of class and give explanation
- T goes around and help them -Work in groups
-T asks Ss to compare their answers with
another student
-T calls on Ss to write and give the correct
comment
PRODUCTION
Mistake correction: Find out the mistake in
the following sentences and correct them
1.This room has been used by nobody for age
2.The article was written yesterday by my
mother
3.Is beef eaten by people in India.
4.Books may be borrowed from our library by
readers.
5.The chickens often are fed twice a day.

4-Consolidation:- Summarize the main points of the text


5-Homework - Practise exercises in textbook again and in workbook
-How to change a passive voice
- Prepare unit 11- READING

D.P:11/02/09 Period:65
D.T:13/02/09

UNIT 11: NATIONAL PARKS


Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page120 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
A. READING
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to improve reading skills as
scanning for specific information and guessing meaning in context
II.TEACHING AIDS:text book, pictures…
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking:
3- New lesson: A.READING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
PRE-READING The whole class listen to T’s
Activity 1:Answering the questions questions and answer
1.Name some national parks in VietNam you Expected answer: cuc
know or hear about phoung, cat Ba, Cat Tien ,
2.What trees and animals can you see in a phong Nha -Ke bang, Bach
national parks? Ma, U minh.
-T asks Ss to look at the pictures of three 2.Old trees and rare and
national parks on page 112 and asks: endangered animals
3.Where are they of them located? -Discuss in groups about two
4.What are the most important feature of questions
them?
Activity 2: Presenting new words - Read through the three
+to be located in =to be in a particular place passage and find out
+ establish(v) = set up newwords that don’t mention
+ rain forest (n) = tropical forest = in task 1
temperature forest - Give the meaning and make
+ orphan(n) = a child without partents sentences with them
An animal without mother-> orphanage(n) = - Pronounce them in chorus
home for orphan - Rewrite them after T deletes
+ toxic (adj) = poisonous English words
Activity 3: Rub out and remember
WHILE READING
TASK1: WORDS’ DEFINITION The whole class do task 1.
-T asks Ss to read the definition intask 1 and -Expected answer:
guess their meaning .Then turn back the 1.establish 4.survival
passage and find the words that express its 2.contain 5.sub-
definition tropical
- Encourage Ss to compare their answer with a 3.species
partner 6.contamination
-Call on some Ss to speak and give the
VietNamses meaning if necessary
- Give the correct answers
TASK2; COMPREHENSION QUESTIONS - Read the passages and
-T asks Ss to read the passage carefully again answer the questions in pairs
and answer the questions in the textbook in - expected answer:
pairs 1.200 square km(line4)
- Call on some pairs to practise them 2.because the rainy season is
- Feedback and give correct answers: over
3.They can learn about the
habits of animal, how to
TASK3: COLLECTING INFORMATION recognise the different and
-T asks Ss to work in groups of 4 and find the how one species is dependent

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page121 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
simple information about three national parks upon another for survival(11-
-Complete the following table 13)
Cuc Nairobi Everglad
phuong es
-Work in groups
Locatio In south In kenya In the
n west of south
HaNoi-Vn easten US
Special -butterflies , -large -both
featur caves, variety of tropical &
es mountains, animals & temperat
1,000 year plants e forest
old tree. -lots of
-toxic
-contain 200 orphaned
km2of animals
levels of
rainforest are taken chemical
care of in the
water -Work in groups
POST-READING
-Asnwering the questions in groups
1.In three national parks you’ve learnt what
park would you like to visit? Why?
2.Why do government set up national parks in
their country ?
*to protect wildlife
4-Consolidation:- Summarize the three passages
5-Homework - Learn by heart newwords
- Prepare part B: SPEAKING

D.P:11/02/09
Period:66
D.T:17/02/09

UNIT 11: NATIONAL PARKS


B.SPEAKING
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to use conditional sentences type 3 to
talk about an excursion
Improve Ss’ speaking skill
II. TEACHING AIDS: Text book…
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Reading the passage and answerin gthe questions
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page122 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
3- New lesson: Part B: SPEAKING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
WARM-UP:Brainstorming
-T divides the whole class in two groups and -Listen to T's eliciting and
give the situation: play game
Last year we had a camping terip at school ( or In groups
picnic with your friends or class) .Tell me what drinks
you prepared for that trip? food
- The representative of each group will present tents
their result.
-T gives comment and supplies other ideas
PRESENTATION luggage Preparation for
Activity 1: TASK1: Matching money a camping trip
-T asks Ss to Ss to comebine the things in
column A with the corresponding
consequences in column B and say out the candles blankets
sentences
-T goes around and helps them -Work individually and peer-
-T can explains some newwords comparation
+ go by( bus, car, coach.....) - Talk about the things as
+ fine: model after matching
+ food poisoning
+ get lost= unable to find way
+ carsick(adj)= feeling sick on the car
-Call on some Ss to talk loudly as a model
Model: They went to Huong Pagoda by coach
so they got carsick
Activity 2: TASK2: Showing regrets
Instruction: You are Nga’s classmates and you
are not happy with the excursion to Huong -Listen to T's eliciting and
Pagoda.Now you are talking with some friends express their regrets about
about what you wish had or hadn’t done as an excursion
model
Model:If we had not gone by coach , we -Note : Type 3:
would not have got carsick If + S+ had + past par , S+
If we had gone by bike , we would not would + have + past par
have got carsick Use: to express about unreal
- before Ss do the task 2, T asks Ss to read situation in the past
model and tell the grammatical structure is
used
- Work in groups to do the task
- Go around and help them
- Call some Ss to speak loudly their sentences
POST-SPEAKING
TASK3: Asking and answering( look and say -Work in pairs
technique)
- T asks Ss to work in pairs .One of you is Nag
and the other in another school.Ask and
answer about an excursion
- T gives the dialogue on the blackboard and
asks Ss to make the same
Model:Nga’sfriend: Last Saturday, I phoned
you but you weren’t at home . Your dad said
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page123 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
that you were going on an excursion. Where
did you do?
Nga.I went to Huong Pagada with my class.
A: Really? Was that fun?
B Not really?
A: Why so?
B: Most of the things we did went wrong
A: Tell me, How did you do there?
1
B: If we had not gone by coach , we would
not have got carsick. 2
Nag’s friend Nga
-Ask about the means -Answer
of transport
-.Ask about the food -Answer
- Ask about the -Answer
duration of the
excursion -Answer
-Ask what they did in
Huong Pagoda
4-Consolidation:- Express your regrets about an excursion by using the
conditional sentences
5-Homework - Asking and answering about an excursion
- Prepare part C: LISTENING

D.P:14/02/09 Period:67
D.T:18/02/09

UNIT 11: NATIONAL PARKS


C. LISTENING
I.OBJECTIVES:
- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to get specific information about
Cuc phuong National Park
- Improve listening skill
II.TEACHING AIDS: Text book, cassete player pictures …
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking Ss to ask some Qs about an excursion
3- New lesson: Lesson3: LISTENING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
WARM-UP: Matching pictures
-T divides the class into 4 groups and gives - Work in groups of four
each group a handout Ss are required to match -Listen information and
the name of each national parks in Vietnam match pictures
with suitabl description. A:Phong nha- Ke Bang
-The first group to have the correct nswer will B:Ba Be
be the winner C: Bai Tu Long
D: Ba vi
E: Con Dao
PRE-LISTENING - Work groups
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page124 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
Activity 1: Answerring the questions -Discuss and give the
- T asks Ss to read the questions in textbook naswers for Qs in textbook
and work in pairs -Expected answer:
-Call some pairs to practise loudly in front of 1.Is is the South West of
class HaNoi
- T listens and checks their answer 2.It contains over 200 square
- T writes their answers on the board Km of rainforest
Activity 2: Vocabulary 3.It is during the dry season ,
- Ask Ss to listen and repeat the newwords from October to April when
before explaining their meaning rainy season is over
+ threatened and endangerd species:những loài 4.Visit Caves, see butterflies,
bị nguy hiểm và đe dọa hike mountains and look at
+ ethnic minority: daân tộc thiểu số 1000 year old tree
+flora(n) : heä thöïc vaät -Listen to T's eliciting and
+ fauna(n): heä ñoäng vaät copy down
+defeat(v) to win a victory over a competitor -Pronounce the words after T
+ the Qing invaders:quaân xaâm löôïc nhaø
Thanh
WHILE LISTENING - The whole class
Task 1: Filling missing information - Listen to T's eliciting and
-T: You are going to listen to the passage about guess their answers
Cuc Phuong National Park in VietNam and fill in - Listen to the tape and give
the missing information the correct answers
-Before listening , T asks Ss to read all -Expected answer:
sentences in task 1 and try to work out what 1.1960
they are going to hear . Then anticipate the 2.160 km
grammatical form as well vocabulary 3.100,000 visitors
Ex: in + year 4.2,000- 450
located+ number 5.surprise attack
nearly+ number
there are +number
its+ noun
-Play the tape twice so that Ss listen the
passage clearly
-Call on some Ss to give their answers -Thewhole class read the
- Feedback questions and answer without
Task 2: Answering questions listening
- T asks Ss to read the questions first and - Listen to the tape again and
understand them give answer
-Underline the keywords - Expected answer:
- Guess the answers without listenning 1.It covers 3 provinces : Ninh
-If not, T plays the tape again Binh, Hoa Binh and Thanh
- Encourage Ss to compare their answers with Hoa
a friend 2.It is about 160 km
- Check and give feedback 3.tosmee the work being
done to protect endangered
species
4.1789
5.on bee keeping and farming
POST-LISTENING: Summary the listening - Work individually and peer-
-T asks Ss to summarize the main point to talk correction
about the special features of Cuc phuong - Report again in front of
National Park bu using cues below class
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page125 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
+ Cuc Phuong is the
first.......................................................
+ It covers.....................................................
+In 2002,
Nearly.....................................................
+ There are
about .....................................................
+Nguyen Hue’s
army .....................................................

4-Consolidation:- Talk about the special features of Cuc Phuong National Park
5-Homework - Write a short passage about Cuc Phuong National Park
- Prepare Lesson 4: WRITING

D.P:16/02/09 Period:68
D.T:20/02/09

UNIT 11: NATIONAL PARKS


D. WRITING
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of this lesson Ss be able to write letters of acceptance or refusal
-Improve writing skill
II.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking Ss to ask some Qs about Cuc phuong national park
3- New lesson: Lesson4: WRITING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
WARM- UP: NETWORK -Ss are divided into 2 groupd
-T prepares a handout with a network of the and give each group a
word “ letter” handout
-Ss complete the network
with different types of letter
LETTER they know
-The winner will be the group
with the quickest and correct
answers
*Expected answer:
thanking
PRESENTAION
TASK1: FILING THE BLANK invitation LETTER
-T asks Ss to completet the letters on page 117 love
by filling each blank with one of the ways to
accept or refuse an invitation provides in the acceptance ...
table ..
- T asks Ss to work in apairs and reminds them -Ss read through the
that for each blank they have more than one expressions in the table firstly
answer to understand them
-T calls some Ss to go and write their answers -The fill them in the blank and
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page126 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
on the board give feedback
TASK 2: MAKING ORDERLY -Expected answer:
-Rearrange the following sentences to make a 1.That a great idea
letter accepting an invitation to spend a 2.I’d love to, but
weekend in the country I/m soory I can’t (come )
- Ss do work individually and exchange their because
answer with another student when they’ve I’d love to/ I ‘d like
finished I’d be delighted to
-Call on some Ss to speak out the letter
* Note : Features of a letter of acceptance
or refusal
1.Write a letter of acceptance: - Ss give the contents that
-Thank their friends for invitation : they can write this letter
- use one of the ways of accepting to say they -Listen to T's eliciting and
agree to join their friend copy down
2.Write a letter of refusal
- Thank their friends for invitation
- use one of the ways of refusal to say they
can’t join their friend
-Give out the reason
TASk 3: WRITING A LETTER -Work individually
- T asks Ss to read the situation and ask them - Make an outline
to write a reply letter accepting or declining his - Write their writing silently
/her invitation
- T reminds them that they should pay
attention to all the features of this type of
letter( 5 parts)
PRODUCTION -Peer- correction
+ Peer- correction -Give their comment
+ Write their writing on the board
+ Correct in front of class

4-Consolidation:- How to write a letter of acceptance or refusal


5-Homework - Complete their writing at home
- Prepare Lesson 5: LANGUAGE FOCUS

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page127 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10

D.P:16/02/09 Period:69
D.T:

UNIT 11: NATIONAL PARKS


E. LANGUAGE FOCUS
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to distinguish the two sounds /t/
and /d/
and practise conditonal sentences Type 3
- Improve writing skill
II. TEACHING AIDS: text book , cassette player
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Checking their new words
3- New lesson: Lesson5: LANGUAGE FOCUS
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
PRONUNCIATION
1.Present the two sounds /t/ and /d/: -Play game :Listen and write
-T asks Ss to close textbook and read the - Distinguish two sounds in
requirement the words that they have
T: Listen to me carefully and write the words listened
that you’ve listened( play game “ listen and
write”)
+ team, ten , top , tooth, plant , protect,
indirect, intention. hoped
+ damp, door, damage doctor, intend, depend,
cleaned, student
- The student writes 6 words correctly in all , T
gives him/ her marks
2. Elicit: -Listen to T's eliciting and
+ t -> /t/ : ten ,top, table copy down
-> / t / : nature, question
-> / / potential, essential
Regular verb: ed ->/t/ when the end
sound /p//k/f/s/ / /
+ Regular verd: ed -> /d/ ex: arrived, cleaned, - Work in pairs
played - Retell the form and use the
3.Practise the senteces third conditional sentence
GRAMMAR: The third conditional sentence
1.Examples
T: Did you go to school yesterday?
S: Yes, I did/ No, I did not
T : What would havehappen if you hadnot
gone to school yesterday?
S: I would not have understood the lesson.

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page128 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
-T writes this sentence on the board
If you had not gone to school yesterday, you -Give the form and use
would not
If-clause
main -clause
have understood the lesson.
2.Form:
S+ could/ would + have + V3, If +S + had+ V3 - Work individually and
compare their answer with a
3.Use: to express the thing or action that was peer
unreal in the past - Give feedback and
4.Practise : do exercise 1,2,3 in the textbook explanation
Exercise 1: Complete the following the Expected answer:
senteces , using the correct form of the verbs Ex1:
in blanks 1.had known 2.had
- Work in pairs had
-T goes around and help them 3.would have gone4.would
Exercise 2&3; Write the sentences with If for havepassed 4.could have
each situation enjoyed 6.had known 7.had
-T asks Ss to work individually and then killed 8.had stopped
compare a peer
- T goes around and offer to help
- feedback and give correct answers:
PRODUCTION -Work in pairs
Make conditional sentences for each of the -Expected answer:
following situations 1.If he hadnot fallen asleep
1. He crashed his car because he fell asleep while driving, he wouldnot
while driving have crased
-> If 2.If we had had enough
2.We couldn’t go to the concert because we money , we could have gone
didn’t have enough money to the concert
-> 3.If the wind had not been
3.The wind was so strong that the bridge strong , the brigde wouldnot
collaped have collaped
->

4-Consolidation:- How to distinguish two sounds /t/ and /d/


-The form , use of the third conditional sentence
5-Homework - Practise exercise 1,2,3 again and in workbook
- Prepare TEST YOURSELF D

D.P:22/02/09 Period:70
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page129 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
D.T:25/02/09

TEST YOURSELF D
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to do all the exercises that they
have learnt in unit 9,10,11
-Improve four skills
II. TEACHING AIDS: Text book, cassette player
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking Ss to rewrite the conditional sentences
a.I was lost because I did not have a map of a city.->If…………………………
b.He couldnot call Lan because he did not have her number->If…………………….
c.We was carsick because we went there by coach.->
If…………………………………………
3- New lesson: TEST YOUR SELF D
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
WARM- UP:Answering questions - The whole class retell what they
-T asks Ss to answer the questions have learnt from U9-U11
1.What have you learnt about grammar
and topic:Education?
2.What are they?
PRESENTATION:
I-LISTENING:Listening and answering
the questions -Work individually
-T asks Ss to look through the questions - Listen and and answer the
and understand them first. questions
-T can help Ss by explaining newwords if -Some Ss read their answers to
necessary the class
+ geyser: -Expected answer:
- T asks Ss to guess the answer without 1.They go to a national park to
listening enjoy nature
-T plays the tape twice and calls some Ss 2.It became a national park in
to give answers 1872
-Feedback and give correct answers: 3.No, it isn’t .It’s the world’s
argest park
4.It has about 70 geysers
II-READING: Reading the passage and 5.They mustnot pick the flowers,
doing the requirements feed or hunt the animals
1.Find the words or phrases which mean - Work in groups
following -Expected answer:
-T asks Ss to read 4 words or phrases and 1a.junk and litter
understand them carefully b.landscape
- Go back to the passage and find its c. highway
location .Then give their answer d.healthy
-T goes around the class and encourages
help if necessary.
-T explains some newwords:
-T calls some Ss to give answers -Work in groups
2.True or false -Expected answer:
- T asks Ss to read the statements and a.T b.T c.F
decide if it is true or false and give d.F

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page130 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
correct evident from the passage e.T f.T
III-GRAMMAR:VERB-FORM
-T can explain how to do the exercise in
grammar - Listen to T's eliciting and work
- Giving the correct form of verb in individually and compare their
parenthese answer with a peer
-Work in pairs. - After finshing , Two Ss go to the
-Let them have 5 minutes to practise and board and write them down.
encourage them to compare their -Expected answer:
answers with a peer. a1.has been cleaned
-T calls some Ss to give answers in front b1.knew
of the class. 2.have been turned on
-Feedback and give correct answers: 2.would help
3.are waiting
3.knows
C 1.decided 3.I would have
gone out
2.to stay 4.I had not been
IV-WRITING:Complete a letter of - Two students go to the board
invitation and write it down
-T guides Ss to completethe letter of - Give their comment
invitation, using the words and phrses Dear Alen,
given cues a.You are delighted to know that
-T asks Ss to to work individually and your father is giving a party to
peer correction celebrate the new Year.
b.He has invited some relatives and
- T calls 2 Ss to go to the blackboard and
his friends to make the party a
write down your writing . success.
- T checks and corrects their mistakes c.I too have invited a number of my
friends in the neighbourhood.
Mother has asked me to tell you to
come home for the NewYear
celebration.
d.I’m surwe you will be here in time
to share the fun with us on that day.
Love, Helen
4-Consolidation:- Retell all grammatical points from U9 to U11.
5-Homework - Do all exercises again and do more in workbook
- Prepare ONE PERIOD TEST 3

D.P: Period:72
D.T:
CORRECT THE 45 MINUTES TEST-NO3
I.OBJECTIVES:
Helping Ss check their knowledge in One Period Test 3

II.TEACHING AIDS:

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page131 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
III.PROCEDURE:
I-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
II-Checking: No
III- New lesson: TEST CORRECTION 3
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
- T gives some comments before - The whole class listen to T’s
correcting in front of class comments
+ Most students understood about the and remember
knowledge that they have learnt in Unit
9 and 11
+ They used four skills( pronunciation,
reading, writing, and grammar ) well to
do this test
+ They mastered the content of two
topics about nature and environment to
test vocabularies and word form
Besides Some students are bad at their
vocabularies and grammar such as
Passive Voice and conditional
sentences.They can rewrite the
sentences, using given words and
understand how to use passive and DeB
conditonal sentences I- PRONUNCIATION (1M)
DeA 1.A.tomb
I- PRONUNCIATION (1M) 2.B.beer.
1.A.tomb 3.A.worked
2.B.beer. 4.A.travelled
3.A.worked II-MULTIPLE-CHOICE(3MS)
4.A.travelled 1.A would buy
II-MULTIPLE-CHOICE(3MS) 2.B.investigating
1.A would buy 3.B.won
2.B.investigating 4.C.in
3.B.won 5.C.sickness
4.C.in 6.Adestruction
5.C.sickness 7.A.polluted
6.Adestruction 8.A.buying
7.A.polluted 9.D injured
8.A.buying 10.B.of
9.D injured 11.A watched
10.B.of 12.B has worked
11.A watched III-MISTAKE CORRECTION(1M)
12.B has worked 1.B.be
III-MISTAKE CORRECTION(1M) 2.B.has->have
1.B.be 3.A.play-> plays
2.B.has->have 4.B.to buy-> buy
3.A.play-> plays IV-SENTENCE
4.B.to buy-> buy TRANSFORMATION(3MS)
IV-SENTENCE 1.If he weren’t ill, he wouldn’t stay at
TRANSFORMATION(3MS) home.
1.If he weren’t ill, he wouldn’t stay at 2.If Laure hadn’t eaten so much , she
home. wouldnot have put on weight
2.If Laure hadn’t eaten so much , she 3.The film was being watched on TV
wouldnot have put on weight 4.Three books have been written by
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page132 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
3.The film was being watched on TV my sister recently
4.Three books have been written by my 5.If he had a bicycle , he would walk
sister recently to school
5.If he had a bicycle , he would walk to 6.Newwords are learnt by heart by
school her everyday.
6.Newwords are learnt by heart by her V-READING (2m):
everyday. 1.D
V-READING (2m): 2.A
1.D 3.B
2.A 4.C
3.B
4.C

4-Consolidation: -Summarize the main point of this lesson


5-Homework -Revise all grammatical points from unit 9-11.
-Learn the forms and uses by heart
-Prepare Unit12 Lesson1:READING

D.P:01/03/09 Period:73
D.T:04/03/09
UNIT 12:MUSIC
A. READING
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to improve reading skills as
scanning for specific information and guessing meaning in context

II.TEACHING AIDS: Text book, pictures


III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: No
3- New lesson: Lesson1: READING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page133 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
WARM-UP:Completing game -Ss close their tewxtbook and
Jazz music complete a diagram with key
word:MUSIC
-jazz music
-Classical music
Pop music MUSIC rock -pop music
music -rock music
-folk music

-Listen to T’s questions and


Blue music answer them in front of class
-T can ask Ss some questions :
1.Do you like listening to music ?
2.What band do you like best?
3.What singer do you like best?
4.What sort of music do you often listen to ?
5.Can mane some singers or bands who play
pop music? -Listen to the songs and give
PRE-READING the kind of music
Activity 1: Matching
-T asks Ss to hear some songs then matxch -> Rock’n roll
them with a kind of following music ->Pop
1.Yesterday ( the Bettles) ->Folk
2.Baby Once More Times( Britney Spears) ->classical music
3.Ly NguaNgo (dan ca nam bo) -> Jazz
4.Turkish March (Morazt)
5.Narah Johns -Find out the newwords and
Activity 2: Presenting Vocabulary give the meaning
-T asks Ss to read through the passage and - Pronounce them after T’s
find out the new words eliciting
- Give the meaning of them
+express(v) :show meaning by gesture,
behaviour
+ convey(v) express sth:
+ funeral (n)âñaùm tang
+ sense(n)giaùc quan
WHILE-READING -The whole class guess the
TASK1: Matching meaning of the words from
-T asks Ss to read the words in the box and the box
give the part of speech -Give the VietNamese
- T writes these words on the board and asks meaning if necessary
Ss to guess their meaning -Fill them in the sentences
-Then complete them in the sentences -Expected answer:
-Ask Ss to pronounce them in chorus 1.communicate 2.lull
3.delights 4.intergral
part
TASK2: Answering the questions 5.solemn 6.emotion
-T asks Ss to read the passage again and 7.mournful
answer the questions in the book -Read the questions and
-Call on some Ss to answer in front of the class answer them
-Listen and give feedback - Some pairs practise aloud
POST-READING -Expected answer:
Make the dialogue: Work in pairs 1.Language and music
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page134 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
A:How often/you.listen/music? 2.It can express ideas ,
B:..................................................... thought and feelings
A:What type/ music/like? 3.It adds joyfulness to the
B:..................................................... atmosphere of a festival and
A:Why? makes a funeral more solemn
B:..................................................... and mournful
A: What /you /think/music? 4.It makes people happy and
B:..................................................... excited .It delight the senses
5.It is a billion -dollar industry

4-Consolidation:- Summarize the main points


5-Homework - Learn by heart newwords
- Prepare Lesson 2: SPEAKING

D.P:01/03/09 Period:74
D.T:06/03/09
UNIT 12:MUSIC
B. SPEAKING

I.OBJECTIVES:
I-Knowledge: Helping Ss ask and answer about music
II-Skill : Speaking skill
II.TEACHING AIDS: Text book,…
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking Ss to make the dialogue
3- New lesson: Lesson2: SPEAKING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
WARM-UP:Matching pictures
-T gives some pictures about famous singers around -The whole class look
the world and their names: T asks them to a match at the pictures and
1.Mick Carter match them
2.Quang dung -Speak out their answer
3.Britney Spear
4.Alicia Keys
5.Backstreet boys
PRESENTATION
TASK1: Reading The Passage And Answer The
Questions
-T asks Ss to read through the passage that talk
about what Ha Anh says about music. -Listen to T
-T reads aloud the passage and explains some - Give the meaning of
newwords the newwords from the
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page135 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
* Newwords: passage
+ keep sb happy= make sb happy - Listen to T’s eliciting
+ cheer sb up Key:
+ band (n) =a group of musicians 1.She likes pop music
+easy to listen to 2.because it keeps her
--T asks Ss to work in pairs to answer 4 questions in happy
the book 3.The Backstreetboys
-T calls on some pairs to practise loudly 4.She listens to music
-T gives feedback all the time
TASK2: Ask And Answer About The Music
-Before do the task , T asks them to look at the first
column of the table which includes 5 items. They
should ask their friends - Listen to T’s eliciting
Ex: kind of music: -Make the dialogue
What type/ kind of music do you like? with the items
Classical music - Make the questions
I like classical music and answer
T tells Ss to form of groups of three and make the -Practise in parirs
questions and answer
Items Asking Answerin
g
Kind of What kind of music
music do you like?
reasons Why do you like it?
Favourite Who is your
band / favourite singer/
musician musician?
Favourite What is your
song/ piece Favourite song/
of music piece of music?
When listen When do you listen
to music to music
-T goes around observing , offering help and
collecting any mistakes and errors for later correction
-T provides Ss with adjectives and expressions
+ make sb excited/ feel relaxed/ comfortable/ happy
+help sb forget troubles and worries -Work in group of fout
+ relaxing and then a journalist of
-T calls on some pairs to practise a dilogue in front of each group will report
class the information what
PRODUCTION they’ve found out
TASK3: Reporting On The Information about their partner.
-Now report what you have found out to the whole
class
-Before Ss report, T elicits the structures they can see
+ Both A and B like
+ A likes ....... so does B
+ A likes .......and B does ,too
+ A likes .......but B prefers ..
+ A likes .......but B likes...

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page136 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10

4-Consolidation:- Summarize the main points


5-Homework - Learn by heart newwords
- Prepare Lesson 3: LISTENING

D.P:08/03/09 Period:75
D.T:
UNIT 12:MUSIC
C. LISTENING
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to listen to get specific information about
listening passage
-Improve Ss’ listening skill
II. TEACHING AIDS: Text book, cassette player
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking Ss to make the dialogue about the music
3- New lesson: Lesson3: LISTENING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
WARM-UP: Network -T asks ss to work in
groups to complete a
network with the word
“ musician “ as quickly
as possible .T can print
Foreign Musician this handout one copy
VietNamese to each group
-The 1st group to
produce the correct
and complete network
will be the winner
PRE-LISTENING
Activity 1: Talk about Van Cao

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page137 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
-T asks Ss to look at the picture on pae on 127and
tell the class anything they know about Vancao -Look at the picture
-T reads the names of the sons on page 128 out and talk about him
lod .Whenever T speaks oput a song name ,Ss say - Expected answer
whether it is a Vancao or not. +Van cao’s songs: Soui
-If the songis not one by Vancao , T asks Ss if they Mo, Tien Quan Ca,
know who wrote that song Truong Ca Song Lo,
Activity 2: Vocabulary Lang Toi
T presents vocabulary +Tinh Ca-> Hoang Viet
+ rousing(adj): phaán chaán + Ha Noi Mua Thu-> Vu
+lyrical(adj): tröõ tình Thanh
+ rural(adj) :
+ sweet and gentle(adj) : ngoït ngaøo vaø nheï -Explain the meaning of
nhaøng the words
-T asks ss to repeat them in chorus -Pronounce them in
WHILE-LISTENING chorus
TASK1:TRUE OR FALSE
-before listening , T asks Ss to read through the
sentences to understand clearly -The whole class read
- Ss give the prediction for the sentences all the statements and
- Play the tape three times and pay attention understand
keywords - Guess if they are
- T calls on some ss to give the correct answer trueor false
-Feedback -Listen to the tape and
give their answer
* Asnwer:
1F( the guest is Quang
Hung)
2.F( he likes some
VietNamese musician)
TASK2: ANSWERING THE QUESTIONS 3.T
-T asks ss to read the questions first and answer 4.F (1994)
them 5.F( he always feels
-If not, T plays the tape again pround of his country
- Calls on some Ss to answer and give explanation when he hears the
-T checks and gives feedback songs )
POST-LISTENING - Answer the questions
Game: FIND OUT SOMEONE WHO in pairs
Quand Hung’s ideas Person Person Reaso -Answer:
who who ns 1.It’s “ my favourite
agrees disagree Musician”
s 2. Tien Quan Ca
1/The best 3.It’s hard and solemn,
VietNamese musician it makes him feel great
of all times is VanCao amnd pround of his
Tien Quan Ca is hard country
and solemn
3/His songs about -Play game
rural life in VN are -Ss go around and
sweet and gentle and interview different
very lyrical students to complete
the table
- Report the names of
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page138 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
their friends

4-Consolidation:- Summarize Van cao’s information and his music


5-Homework - Learn by heart newwords
- Prepare Lesson 4: WRITING

D.P:08/03/09 Period:76
D.T:
UNIT 12:MUSIC
D.WRITING
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to write a profile based on
prompts provided
-Improve teir writing skill
II. TEACHING AIDS:text book,…
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Asking Ss to talk some information about Van Cao
3- New lesson: Lesson4: WRITING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
WARM-UP: MATCHING PROFILES -Work in ngroups of four
-T divides the whole class into 4 groups -Listen and match the name with
and gives its profile
each group a handout -Answer:
-T asks Ss to read the profiles and find 1.My Tam
name of 2.Trinh Cong Son
each singer and musician as quickly as 3.Celine Dion
possible 4.My Linh
-The winner will be the group with the
quickest and correct answers
PRESENTATION
TASK 1: SENTENCES COMPLETION -Listen to T’s eliciting
-Instruction:You are required to make up - Complete the sentences , using
complete sentences about Scott Joplin, a the cues
famous American musician using the -Work in groups
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page139 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
prompts provided -The representative of each group
-T divides the whole class into groups of will go to the borad and write the
six sentences
-Each group member will write a sentenc -Correct and give their comments
-T goes around to help
Note: Tense of verb
Articles in each
sentence
Prepositions
-T calls on 6 groups to go to the board -Listen to T’s eliciting
and each of them will write down a - Givethe information that a profile
sentence has
-T elicits self and precorrection - Pay attention the tenses,
HOW TO WRITE A PROFILE supplement, articles,
1.Name prepositions......when necessary
2.place of bith/ date of birth
3.Family
4.Profession
5.Interests
6.Works
7.date /place of death
WRITING -Work individually
TASK2: Writing about the life story -Exchange their writing into
of Van cao another student
-T asks Ss to read the information below -Peer-correction
and write a profile about the life story of
Van cao
--Before writing , T asks them to read
through prompts. T reminds Ss to use the
right tense4 of verbs, supplement,
articles, prepositions......when necessary
- T asks Ss write it in 10 minutes
FFEDBACK ON WRITING
-T asks Ss to exchange their writing with
another student for a peer correction
- T goes around and collects mistankes
and errors

4-Consolidation:- How to write a profile


5-Homework - Complete their writing
- Prepare Lesson 5: LANGUAGE FOCUS

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page140 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10

D.P:10/03/09 Period:77
D.T:
UNIT 12:MUSIC
E. LANGUAGE FOCUS
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to distinguish the sounds /s/
and /z/
And use To- infinitive and clause of purpose

II.TEACHING AIDS: text book, cassette player


III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Checking their new words
3- New lesson: Lesson5: LANGUAGE FOCUS
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
PRONUNCIATION
1.Examples: find out the different word -The whole class
that pronounce the others -Expected answer:
1a.peas b.zoo c.relax d.prize 1.C 2.A 3.B
2a.Susan b.spring c.sad d.solf 4.A
3a.fiction b.listens c.wish d.mission
4a.music b.finish c.option
d.depression
2 Eliciting: /s/ and /z/
-T helps Ss to distinguish two sounds -Listen to T’s eliciting and
/s/ see, sight , slow copy down
/z/ has, is, was, jobs, reason -distinguish the sounds
* s / ∫/ sure, sugar, wash - Give the other examples
/ ʒ/ usually, dicision, vision
* singular verb and plural noun +s
/s/ books, stops, laughs, months
S /z/ coìn laûi
/iz/ +es glasses, boxes, churches
3/Listen and repeat -Listen and repeat
-T asks Ss to read the words in the book -Practise the sentences
-Practise the sentences -Work individually

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page141 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
-T reads the sentences and asks Ss to underline
the words with the sounds and write /s/ or /z/
GRAMMAR:
I- To infinitive and clause of purpose
1.Examples:
T: What do you learn English for ?
S1: to get knowledge -Ss answer the questions
S2:to find out the a good job and give the meaning of the
2.Form : sentences
a.Phrase of purpose -Give the form and use of
to phrase and clause of
in order to + bare infinitive purpose
so as to
Negative form -Give the other exampls
In order not to + bare infinitive EX:
So as not to She got up early so that she
b. clause of purpose could not be late for
so that + clause(S+ can /could meeting
+bare-inf) -> She got up early in order
in order for not to be late for meeting
3.Meaning : to express a purpose of an action
II-WH-question
1.Examples:
What are you doing?
When was you born?
2.Form : -The whole class read the
Wh-word + auxiV+ S +V? questions and give the form
3.Matching -Match Wh- word and its
When time meaning
Where manner
Who reason
Why person
How many/ much quantity
What place
How object/idea/ action
PRACTICE
Exercise 1: Give the correct words in brackets to
answer questions
-T reminds them to use a suitable verb for each
the sentences -The whole class do exercise
Exercise 2.Gap-filling 1,2 and 3
Exercise 3: Make wh-questions for the - Go to the board and write
underlined words / phrases in the following their answer down
sentences -The others give comment
and the correct feedback

4-Consolidation:- Retell the grammatical points


5-Homework - Practise exercise 1,2,and 3 again and prepare lesson 1:
READING

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page142 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10

D.P:15/03/09 Period:78
D.T:17/03/09
UNIT 13:FILMS AND CINEMA
A. READING
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to develop such micro-reading skills as
scanning for specific information and guessing mezning in context
II.TEACHING AIDS: text book, cassette player
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Making Wh-questions for the sentneces
3- New lesson: Lesson1: READING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
WARM-UP: NET WORK
-T divides the whole class into two groups and -Work in groups of two
asks Ss tocompletet network releted to the -List the kinds of film that
cinema they know
Horror film -The group has more words
and quickest , will be the
winner

Cartoon CINEMA
science film

Drama -Listen to T’s questions and


PRE_READING answer them in front of
Activity 1: Answering the questions class
-T asks Ss to listen and answer the questions in
pairs
1.What do you see in the picture in the
textbook?
2.Why do people come here?
3.Do you want to see a film at the cinema or on
TV? Why? -Find out the newwords and
4.What kind of film do you like? give the meaning
5.Can you name some of the films you have - Pronounce them after T’s
seen? eliciting
Activity 2:Presenting vocabulary
-T asks Ss to read through the passage and find
out the newwords
-Help them give the meaning of these words
+motion(n) the act of moving : chuyeån ñoäng -The whole class guess the
+ set sth in motion(exp)=move sth meaning of the words from
+ still(adj) =silent the right column
+ audience(n) =viewer: people watch film in the -Give the VietNamese
theatre meaning if necessary

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page143 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
+ spread (v) =to extend over a place - Find the word and match
+ to replace(v) =to take place of -Expected answer:
WHILE-READING 1.cinema 2.sequence
TASK1:Find the word and match 3.decade 4.rapidly
-T asks ss to read the passage silently and then 5.scene 6.character
do the task 1 -Read the questions and
- Find the word in the passage that can match answer them
with the definition on the right column - Some pairs practise aloud
- T goes around and help them if necessary
- T calls on some ss to give their answer
-feedback
TASK2: Answering the questions -The whole class
-T asks Ss to work in pairs : Ask and asnwer the -Expected answer:
questions in their book B A brief History of cinema
- T calls on some pairs to practise aloud
- T listens and give the correct feedback
TASK3: Main idea
- Tasks Ss to read the option A,B,C and find out
the differences betewwn them
-T can help them explain newwords -The whole class read the
- Get Ss’s information from the passage history ofcinema and
-T gives feedback complete the chart
POST-READING :Summary the history of - Work in groups
cinema - Write their answer on the
board
time Events and film form
In the early (1).................................
19th C Moving photographs, 1
minute long
1905 (2) .................................
Early 1910s (3) .................................
1915 (4) .................................
Late 1920s Sound was introduced , old
silent films were replaced by
spoken ones .
(5).................................

4-Consolidation:- Talk about the history of cinema , using the cues below
5-Homework - Learn new words by heart
-Prepare lesson 2: SPEAKING

D.P:15/03/09 Period:79
D.T:18/03/09
UNIT 13:FILMS AND CINEMA
B. SPEAKING
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page144 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to talk about the kind of film that they like
and the reason
-Improve speaking skill
II.TEACHING AIDS: text book…
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Talking about the history of cinema
3- New lesson: Lesson2: SPEAKING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
WARMER: BRAINSTORMING
-T divides the whole class into four groups and Work in groups of four
brainstorm of the adjectives describing of film -List the adjs describing
films that they know
-The group has more words
Boring FILMS and quickest , will be the
interesting winner
* Asnwer: boring, exciting,
interesting, surprising,
violent, moving, terrifying,
-T asks: disappointing, funny,
How much do you like each kind of film ? why? thrilling, bad,..
PRESENTATION:
Activity 1: Tick the table
-T asks Ss to open their book and tick in the -Work individually and
table that suit the preferences for a particular mingling activity
type of films -Ss have to take notes of
-Then T asks Ss to move around the class room who and have many friends
and find as many friends that have the same like or dislike the same
preferencesas them as possible types of films as them
-T calls on some Ss to report their likes and
dislikes and the number of friends who have the
same tables as them
TASK2: Practise the dialogue
-T explans Ss how to make a dialogue about -Listen to T’s guiding and
asking and answering of feeling films practise the same
- T asks Ss to read the given words in the tavble
and understand clearly -Remember structures
* Vocabulary+ structures - Work in groups
+ Sb+ Find + sth/sb+ adj: to express one’s
opinion about sth or sb
Ex: I find horror film fascinating
Note: I don’t agree I agree with you
I disagree You are right
- T asks Ss to make a small group and practise -Work in groups
the model conversation
A:What do you think of .........................?
B:Oh, I find them ......................
C: I don’t agree with you .I find them ........
I agree with you .I find them ........
TASK3: Talk about the preferences for film
* Note: Prefer sth/V-ing to sth/V-ing:thêch
......hån
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page145 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
Ex: I prefer romantic film to action film -Work in pairs
-T asks Ss to practise the dialogue as the model:
A: Which do you prefer,
.......................or....................?
B: Well, it’s difficult to say .But I suppose I * Expected answer:
prefer.....to........ I saw a very good film on TV
PRODUCTION: last night .It’s an
TASK4: Work in groups:Talk about a film you educational film.It is about a
have seen.Use the suggestions below man who felt sorry for what
he had done in the past and
then he tried to do
sonething as a
compensation for his terrible
mistakes.It is moving film I
like it and learn many things
from it .It also gives me
good lessons for life

4-Consolidation:- Talk about a film you have seen


5-Homework - Practise the dialogues again
-Prepare lesson 3: LISTENING

D.P:17/03/09 Period:80
D.T:20/03/09
UNIT 13:FILMS AND CINEMA
C. LISTENING
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to master infromation about plan
of Lan and Huong next week
-Improve listening skill
II. TEACHING AIDS: Text book, cassette player
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Talking about the film that you have seen
3- New lesson: Lesson3: LISTENING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page146 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
WARM-UP: FIND SOME ONE WHO
LIKES ......in free time -Ss go around and ask the other
Find some one who Nam what they do in their free time .Then
likes..... e write their names in the paper
Going shopping -Report the result in front of class
Watching TV
Chatting on the Net
Reading books
Cooking
Going to the cinema with -The whole class
friends - complete the table and answer T’s
Going swimming questions
PRE-LISTENING
Activity 1: TABLE COMPLETION
-T asks Ss to look at the table on page
136 and goes over the points together
with the whole class by asking questions - listen and repeat the words given
such as: -Give the meaning of these words
How often do you go to the cinema? - pronounce them in chorus
How about listening to the radio?
-T calls on some Ss to answer their ideas
Activity 2:LISTEN AND REPEAT
T asks Ss to listen and repeat the words
given
- Then T helps them explain the
meaning of these words
+ Titanic: the name of film - look at the picture in the textbook
+ instead(conj): thay vì abd predict the content of the
+ suppose(v) cho raèng conversation
+ guess(v) -Listen to the tape and answer the
+ picnic(n) questions
-T asks Ss to pronounce them in chorus Answer: Titanic ison Thang Tam
WHILE-LISTENING Cinema next week .They are going
TASK1: PREDICTION to there to see
-T asks Ss to look at the picture in the
textbook abd predict the content of the -Work in pairs
conversation - Compare their answer with another
- T elicits by asking questions such as: pairs
1.What can you see in the picture? Day Lan Huong
2.What film may they want to see? Mon See a play
-Then T plays the tape and Ss answer Tues
the question in the textbook Wed Work and
TASK2: PLAN COMPLETION go to the
-T asks Ss to remember what Lan and singing club
Huong talk about their plans from the Thur Visit
previous listening s grandparents
-T writes answers on the board and Fri Study
check with the whole class if they are chinese
correct Sat Work (busy)
-Listen again and write Lan and Huong Sun Go on a
plans for the next week on the calendar picnic
-T calls on some Ss to write their answer

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page147 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
on the board
-T gives the correct feedback
TASk3: ASNWER THE QUESTION
T: What day can Lan and Huong meet ?
-Look at the calendar and answer the
question -Key: Tuesday because they are
POST-LISTENING both free on Tuesday
Make the dialogue : Plan for the next
week
A: I’m going to give a picnic with my -Pair work : Ask and answer the
family for the next week.Can you go question to plan for the next week
with me ? - Practise as the model
B:(Busy)
A:Are you free on ........?
B: :(Busy)
A:.....................................

4-Consolidation:- Talk about your plan for the next week


5-Homework - Learn vocabulary by heart
-Prepare lesson 4: WRITING

D.P: Period:81
D.T:
UNIT 13:FILMS AND CINEMA
D. WRITING
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to write a descriptive paragraph about
a film they have seen
-Improve Ss’ writing skill
II.TEACHING AIDS: Text book…
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Talking about the plan that you are going to make with
friends next week
3- New lesson: Lesson4: WRITING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page148 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
WARM-UP: Talk about the film
-T asks Ss to close their book -Dicusee in groups
T asks : What do you know about the *expected answer:
Titanic? -Large luxury liner
-famous
-Sink
-Icebery
-Lovers
-Many people died

PRESENTATION: -The whole class


TASK1: Working with the model - Read the passage and understand
-T asks Ss to open their textbook and - Answer the qeustions and
read through the passage . complete the table
-T helps them to elicit some newwords: - Write them on the board
+ sink (v): chìm Title Titanic
+ disaster(n): thaûm hoïa Type Love story film
+generous(adj): phoùng khoaùng Plot A tragic story of
+ occur(v)=happen love and the
+ engaged(adj): sinking of a
-T asks Ss to read these words after T’s luxury ship in
explanation the Atlantic
-T asks Ss to answer the questions and Ocean , causing
draw the table of summary on the borad more than
-T goes around to help Ss to complete 1,5000people
the task died
-T calls on some ss to answer and gives Filming(place) America
the correct answer Based on The true story
HOW TO WRITE A DESCRIPTIVE of the Titanic
PARAGRAPH OF FILM diaster in 1912
1.The title of film Main charater Jack: young and
2.Type generous
3.Plot adventure who
4.Filmimg : where the film is made died in the
5:Based on: what the film based on disater
6.Main charaters Jose: was saved
MAKE AN OUTLINE by Jack and with
-T asks ss to work in groups of four and whom she fell in
make an outline by using the table love later
below about the film that they have
seen.
Title -Work in group
Type -Make an outline about a film that
Plot they have seen
Filming(place) - Write their on the board
Based on
Main charater
_ T asks ss to do in 5 minutes and then
calls on 3 students to go the board and
write them
- T helps ss to correct their mistakes and
give the comment -Work in group again

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page149 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
WRITING -Encourage them to exchange their
- T introdues the task: Then T asks Ss to writing
spend 10 minutes gathering and - Peer-correction
organizing for paragraph, using an
outline above
-T asks Ss to exchange their paper ibnto
another group to check their mistake
- T goes around and help them
- Calls on 2 students and write their
writing on the board
-T corrects their mistakes in front of
class
4-Consolidation:- How to write a descriptive paragraph about a film they
have seen
5-Homework - Learn vocabulary by heart
-Complete their writing
-Prepare lesson 5: LANGUAGE FOCUS

D.P: Period:82
D.T:
UNIT 13:FILMS AND CINEMA
E. LANGUAGE FOCUS
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to distinguish the sounds/f/and /v/ and
use some attitudinal adjectives, article, and some structures
II.TEACHING AIDS: Text book, cassette player
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Checking their new words
3- New lesson: Lesson5: LANGUAGE FOCUS
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page150 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
PRONUNCIATION -Read the words
1.Examples: find out the different - Distinguish two sounds in the
word that pronounce the others words that they have listened
1a.laugh b.cough c.orphan
d.though
2a.phone b.photo c.enough
d.weigh
3a.loaf b.leave c.over -Listen to T's eliciting and copy
d.live down
2 Eliciting: /f/and /v/ -Practise the sentences
-T helps Ss to distinguish two sounds
gh
/f/ ph
F
*/f/ is silent: gh stand after: i ou :sight,
weigh, neighbor, though , although
/v/ -> of
3/Listen and repeat
-T asks Ss to read the words in the book
-Practise the sentences
-T reads the sentences and asks Ss to
underline the words with the sounds and
write /f/ or /v/ - Work in pairs
GRAMMAR: - Give the different between two
I- ATITUDINAL ADJECTIVES adijectives in each sentences
1.Examples:
a.This film is interesting
-> We are interested in thins film
b. He found this trip boring -Give the form and meaning
-> His trip makes him bored
2.Form and meaning:
* Adjectives ending with V-ing used with
nouns refering to things implying the
active meaning -Listen to T’s explanation
* Adjectives ending with V-ed used with -Give the form of structure
nouns refering to people implying the
passive meaning
II-Structure: It was not until ...
1.Examples:
a.I did not graduate from University
before 1996
-> It was not until 1996 that I graduated
university - Work individually and compare
b.Her did not know to play the piano their answer with a peer
until he was ten years old - Give feedback and explanation
-> It was not until he was ten years old
that he knew to play the piano
2.Form :
It was not until +time / clause of time
that +S+ V2
III-ARTICLES:
1.Examples: complete a/an or the
I have ........dog.............dog is very
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page151 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
intelligent. It likes to play with
.......orange
2.Eliciting:
a.A/AN: indifinite aritcles
a +consonant + singular -Work individually and compare
noun their answer with a friend
an + vowel -Speak their answer in front of class
Not: an Mp a uniform
An hour a university
A union
b.THE:+noun( singular, plural,
uncountable noun)
+ definite noun
+ the + a vowel .->/ i:/
PRACTICE:do exercise 1,2,3
-The whole class do exercise 1,2 and 3
- Go to the board and write their answer
down
-The others give comment and the
correct feedback

4-Consolidation:- Retalk the grammatical points in this lesson


5-Homework - Practise grammar and do exercise in the workbook
-Prapare Lesson 1: READING

D.P:23/03/09 Period:83
D.T:26/03/09

UNIT 14:THE WORLD CUP


A. READING
I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to develop their reading skills as
scanning for specific information and guessing meaning in context
II. TEACHING AIDS: text book,pictures
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking:
3- New lesson: Lesson1: READING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page152 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
WARM-UP:
-T plays the music and asks -The whole class listen to
1.What is the name of the song? the music and answer T’s
2.What is the song about ? questions
3.Do you know any information about World Expected answer:
Cup? 1.The cup of life
T: to understandmore about the Wrold Cup 2.About football/ World Cup
.Let’s move to the nnew lesson, The World Cup
PRE-READING
Activity 1: Multiple Choice
1.How often is the World Cup held?
a.every year b.every four year c.every two
year
2.Where was the 2002 World Cup held? -Listen to T’s questions and
a.Japan b.Uruguary c.Argentina d.Japan and choose the best answer
South Korea them in front of class
3.Brazil defeated ...............and won the World -Expecetd answer:
Cup in 2002. 1.B 2.D 3.C
a.Holand b.Germany c.Italy 4.A 5.D 6.D
d.Japan
4.When did the first World Cup take place?
a.1930 b.1951 c.1966
d.1998
5.The World cup is watched by millions of people
around.... -Find out the newwords and
a.Asia b.Europe c.Africa give the meaning
d.Globe - Pronounce them after T’s
6......................organizes World Cup eliciting
a.WHO b.UNESCO c.WTO
d.FIFA
Activity 2:Presenting vocabulary
-T asks Ss to read through the passage and find
out the newwords
-Help them give the meaning of these words -The whole class guess the
+ Championship(n) :state of being a champion meaning of the words from
+ witness(n) to see -> witness person the right column
+ elimination game : -Give the VietNamese
+continent(n)Asia, africa, European meaning if necessary
+finalist : the team who goes to the final match - Find the word and match
+ honoured title(n) : danh hieäu cao quí -Expected answer:
WHILE-READING 1.b :âäöìng täø chæïc
TASK1: Matching 2c:toaìn cáöu
-T asks ss to read the passage silently and then 3.a:giaíi thi âáúu
do the task 1 4.e:næåïc chuí nhaì
- Find the word in the passage that can match 5.d:cuïp
with the definition on the right column -Work individually and then
- T calls on some ss to give their answer compare their answer with
TASK2:Gap-filling another friend
-T asks Ss to scan the passage and complete -Read their answer
each of the following sentences with one word 1.13 2.32
or number 3.Argentina 4.one
- T asks Ss to give the part of speech of each 5.26
blank before to do this task -Read the questions
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page153 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
- T goes around and help them if necessary carefully and give the
-T calls on some ss to answer in front of class correct answers
TASK3: True or false - Some Ss practise aloud
-T asks Ss to work individually and read all the -Key:
sentences and decide whether they are true or 1.F->1930
false.Then correct the false ones 2.F-> every four years
- T goes around and help them if necessary 3.T
- T listens and give the correct feedback 4.F-> 32national teams
POST-READING :Summary the table compete in the final
Year Events tournament
(1)......... FiFa was set up 5.F->Brazil was awarded the
1930 Only(2) ......took part in the gold cup in the 2002 World
first tournament cup
1930 (3) .................................
(4)........... The world witness 17 world
cup tournament
Up to now National football teams must
compete in elimination
games within their own
region beforwe becoming one
of the .......(5)
2002 (6)....................................
4-Consolidation:- Talk about the history of World cup , using the cues below
5-Homework - Learn vocabulary by heart and Prepare lesson 2: SPEAKING

D.P:28/03/09 Period:84
D.T:
UNIT 14:THE WORLD CUP
B. SPEAKING

I.OBJECTIVES:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to practise asking and answering
about World Cup

II.TEACHING AIDS: Text book


III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Talking some information about the World Cup
3- New lesson: Lesson2: SPEAKING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page154 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
WARMER: JUMPLED WORDS
1.W-E-R-N-N-I -Work in groups of two and
2.O-I-C-H-P-A-M-N rearrange jumpled words into
3.R-C-O-E-R the meaningful words
4.N-N-E-R-U-R-P-U -Then answer the question
5.T-O-H-S T-O-C-U-R-N-Y
-T asks Ss to rearrange jumpled words into the
meaningful words
Ask:Can you guess what topic will we discuss
today?
-> Today we will talk about World Cup
PRESENTATION
Activity 1: A World Cup 2006 quiz -Work in groups of two
-T can write the questions on a different cards -Play the game and choose
Q1: which team do you like best in World Cup the number for groups
2006? -Answer the questions about
Q2: Who was the captain of the French national the World Cup 2006
football in World Cup 2006 final ? -Expected answer:
Q3:What place did Germay hold in World Cup 2.Zidan
2006? 3.5-3
Q5:Who was the head coach of the German 4Jurgen Klinmann
team in World Cup 2006? 5.Miroslav Klose
Q6:How many times has Italy won the trophy 6.Four times
up to World Cup 2006? 7.David Beckham
Q8:Which nationality was the top scorer in 8.German
World Cup 2006?
Activity 2: Present vocabulary: -Give the VietNamese
-T helps Ss to explain some newwords meaning of the words
+ draw(v,n) a score of 1-1
+lose the match to sb
+defeat sb= beat sb: đánh bại ai đó
+ penalty shoot cut
+ quarter final: -Work in pairs
+ semi final:hieäp phuï -Listen to the model and
PRACTICE: practise the same
TASK1: Asking And Answering About Note : pronounce the score
World Cup 0-0:nil-nil
-T asks Ss to ask and answer Qs as model by 2-0: two-nil
following table 1-1:one all
- Before doing the task , T asksSs to look at the
table and explain
- T sets the model
T: Where was the first World Cup held?
S:It was held in ...............
T: Which teams played in the final match ?
S:.....................and ......................
T:Which team became the champion?
S:....................... The whole class complete the
T: What was the score of the match? diagram
S: ....................... -Expected answer:
TASk 2: Complete the diagram 1.2002
(1) 2.Japan
3.match
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page155 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
Korea and (2) 4.Germany
5.2
Final (3) 6.champion
Ex: The 17th World Cup was
defeated held in 2002 in Korea and
BRAZIL (4) Japan.The final match was
was defeated between Brazil and Germany.
(5) 0 Brazil defeated Germay by 2-
0.Brazil was the champion
(6) Runner-upand Germany was the runner
-Then complete the diagram , T asks Ss to look up.
at it and talk , beginning
The 17th World Cup was held
in ................................... ......... .............. ..........
.............................. ............ ....... .........
4-Consolidation:- Talk about World cup , using the diagram
5-Homework - Learn vocabulary by heart and Prepare lesson 3:
LISTENING

D.P:28/03/09 Period:85
D.T:
UNIT 14:THE WORLD CUP
C.LISTENING
I.OBJECTIVES:
Helping Ss develop such listening micro skills as intensive listening for specific
information
II.TEACHING AIDS: Cassette player
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Talking about the World Cup winners
3- New lesson: Lesson3: LISTENING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
WARMER:Answer the questions
-T asks Ss some questions -The whole class
1.Name some Of the famous football players -Free-talk
in the world?
2.Who do you like best? Why?
3.Among some famous football players , who
is the greatest players of all time?
PRE-LISTENING
Activity 1 :Answer the questions about -Asnwer the questions
PELE Answer: Pele is the greatest
-T asks Ss to look at the picture about PELE player of all time .He was born
and answer the questions in Brazil
1.Do you know anything about Pele? He was an ambassador for the
2.Who is he ? sport
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page156 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
3.Where was he born ? He was good at kicking and
4.Was he an ambassador for the sport? controlling the ball.He scored
5.What was he good at in football? 1200 goals and has become a
6.How many scores did he get? national hero
Activity 2:Listen and repeat
-T helps Ss to explain the words and then
repeat them
+goal-scorer(n):ngæåìi ghi baìn -Thewhole class listen to T’s
+hero(n) eliciting and pronounce them
+ambassador(n):âaûi sæï after T
+to kick(v)
+retirement(n) -> retire(v)
+promote(v)
+championship(n)
WHILE-LISTENING
TASK1:COMPLETE INFORMATION:
-T introduces the task and gets to study the
table before they listen -Work individually
-T gets across to Ss that while they listen and -Expected answer
take notes 1.1940
-T plays the tape twice and asks Ss to 2.joined a Brazilian culb
complete 3.1962
-T calls on some Ss to give their answer 4.1974
-Listen and give feedback 5.retired
TASK2: ANSWER QUESTIONS -Work in apirs
-T asks Ss to read all the questions and -Expected answer:
answer them before listening again 1.Pele was famous for his
-If not , T plays the tape again and asks Ss to powerful kicking and
answer them aloud controlling the ball
- Then work in pairs 2.He participated in 3 World
-T calls on some pairs to practise in front of Cup
class 3.He played for an American
POST LISTENING: SUMMARY football culb before he retired
INFORMATION 4.He became an international
PELE ambassador for football. He
1940 works to promote peace and
1956 understanding through
1958 friendly sport activities
1962
1970
1974
before 1977
1977
-T asks Ss to summary the information about
Pele by completting the table above
- Calls on 2 Ss to go to the board and write
their answer

4-Consolidation:- Talk about Pele, a famous football player


5-Homework - Learnt vocabulary by heart

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page157 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
-Prepare lesson 4: WRITING

D.P:30/03/09 Period:86
D.T:
UNIT 14:THE WORLD CUP
D. WRITING
I.OBJECTIVES:
- Helping Ss write a short announcement about a sport event
-Improve writing skill
II.TEACHING AIDS:
III.PROCEDURE:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.
2-Checking: Talking about the Pele
3- New lesson: Lesson4: WRITING
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
WARMER: -ss answer T’s questions after
-T gives an announcement and asks looking at announcement
1.What is it ? -Expected answer:
2.Where do you often see the announcement? 1.It’s an announcement
3.What do we use announcements for? 2.we often see announcement
4.Have you ever read any English on newspaper, TV, notice
announcements? board, magazine
->Today we learn how to write to announce 3.to announce something such
something. as news
4.free talk
-Ss work silently
PRESENTATION -Expected answer
TASK1:Read and answer the questions 1.The national football
-T asks Ss to read Task 1 and answer the championship organizing
questions committee
-Then T checks the answers with the whole 2.The postponing of the match
class between Nam Dinh and Bing
Duong which was initially
schedule on Sunday......due to
the bad weather
HOW TO WRITE AN ANNOUNCEMENT 3.at 3p.m Sunday April 25
-T elicits from Ss what possible details to
include in an announcement
1. who announcers? -Listen to T’s eliciting and
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page158 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
2.What event? copy down
3.When?
4.Where?
5.Why?
-T might also want to remind Ss of the
structure of a paragraph of this type:
S+would like +to announce + phrase
wishes (to) + clause
is/are sorry to
regret to
is/are pleased to
Ex: The Youth Uniopn is pleased to announce
their first meeting on Sunday 24 December , -Work in pairs
2008 -Peer-corrrection
TASK2: WRITING -Encourage Ss to make an
-T asks Ss to read the topices individually and outline before writing their
then work with a partner to analyse the writing
topices, using the following table os Summary TopicA Topic B
to help them take notes Who? The school The HCM
football Communist...
Who?what?when? where? Why?
team
-Then calls on some Ss to write their notes on What Seek new A friendly
the board ? players, amtch with
then 1st New Stars
meeting of Football Culb
the team
When Up to you 5p.m Sunday
? April 20th
Wher Up to you In football
e? field of the
Club
Why? For new
football
reason
PRODUCTION -Two Ss write their writing
Write an announcement to raise money for down the board
people in flooded areas

Announcer: the monitor of class 10B4 -Read an anouncement and


Contents: the musical performance of write it
class 10B4 to raise money for flooded
areas.
Place: school meeting hall
Time: 7.30 pmThursday 23th April
Ticket prize: 2,000VND

4-Consolidation:- How to write an anouncement


5-Homework - Complete their writing
-Prepare lesson 5: LANGUAGE FOCUS

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page159 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10

D.P:02/04/09 Period:87
D.T:07/04/09
UNIT 14:THE WORLD CUP
E. LANGUAGE FOCUS
I. Objectives:
- Students know how to pronounce the sound /g/ and /k/ correctly.
- Students revise: - The uses of will.
- The difference between will and be going to.
II. Anticipated problems:
- Students may not know the difference between will and be going to.
III. Teaching aids: - board, chalk, textbook.
IV. Procedures:
Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Homework checking: ( 5mins)
- Ask two sts to read the announcements - Two sts read the announcements
they wrote aloud. aloud.
- Ask another st to give remarks.
- Check and give marks. - Give remarks.
2. Pronunciation:( 10 mins) - Listen to the teacher.
- Aims: to introduce two sounds /g/ and /k /
and help sts to practise these sounds.
a. Write two sounds on the board and
pronounce them clearly twice, then ask sts
to repeat. - Write down two sounds.
- Tell sts how to pronounce these sounds - Listen to the teacher and repeat.
accurately. - Look at the book , listen and
/ k / : a voiceless sound repeat.
/ g / : a voiced sound /g/ /k/
- Ask sts to pay attention to the length of group club
two sounds. game kick
- Ask them to look at the textbook, listen together cup
and repeat. ...........................
- Read these words in pairs and
- Then ask sts to work in pairs to read the check for their partners.
words again so that they can check for
each other.
- Move around to help . - Look at the book and work in
- Ask two sts to read again and give pairs.
remarks. - Answers:
b. Ask sts to look at sentences in page /g/ /k/
150 in the book. group scored
- Ask them to work in pairs to read the goal took
sentences and then find out the words Uruguay cat
containing sound /g / and sound /k / . ...............................
- Ask them to work in 2 minutes. - Read the sentences.
- Move around to conduct the activity.

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page160 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
- Ask one st to report and other sts to give
remarks.
- Check and give the correct answers.
- Ask some sts to read these sentences
aloud.
- Listen and give remarks.
3. Grammar: ( 29 mins) - Listen to the T.
Aims: to revise the difference between - Look at the examples.
will and be going to, and the uses of - One st tells the difference:
will, and have sts do EX1,EX2 and EX3. + Will: to talk about the future
a. will vs. be going to: and the decision is made at the
- Firstly ask sts to look at the examples moment of speaking.
and tell the difference + Be going to: to talk about
E.g: intentions/ decisions which are
- Wife: This dress looks beautiful. It must made before we report them.
fit me well.
Husband: Ok. I will buy it for you.
- A: Why did you buy so much paint? - Some pairs report.
B: I'm going to repaint my bedroom 1. I'll get 2. I'm going
tomorrow. to wash
- Listen to the S and give remarks. 3. are you going to paint
- Ask sts to do task 1. 4. I'm going to buy 5. I'll show
+ Exercise 2: ...................................
- Ask sts to do Ex 1 in pairs and then share - Listen and correct their work if
the answers with their friends. necessary.
- Move round to help if necessary.
- Ask some pairs to report. - Read the example.

- Check and give remarks.


b. Will: making predictions - Pay attention to the underlined
- Give an example so that sts can part.
remember the use of will.
E.g: A: I like that car very much but I don't
have enough money to buy it. - Tell the T that will is used to talk
B: Ask Jack for some money, please. about what the speaker predicts
He is rich and generous. I'm sure he will about the future.
lend you some.
- Ask sts to read the examples and tell the - Do the Ex individually.
teacher the use of will in this situation. EX3:
+ Exercise 3: 1....he will help .....
- Ask sts to do Ex2 individually and then 2. ... won't lend me .....
share the answers with their friends. 3. ... it will rain.......
- Move round to help if necessary. .................................
- Ask two sts to write their answers on the - Listen to the teacher.
board.
- Read the example.

- Check and give remarks. - Pay attention to the underlined


c. Will: making offer part.
- Give an example so that sts can revise - Tell the T the use of will in this
the use of will: situation:
E.g: A: I'm so tired but I still have a lot of to make offer/ to show willingness.
work to do. - Do the exercise in pairs.
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page161 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
B: Oh, I will help you to finish it. - Some pairs report:
- Ask sts to do Ex 3. 1. I will make you a glass of orange
+ Exercise 3: juice.
- Ask sts to do this execise in pairs. 2. I'll open it.
- Move round to help if necessary. 3. I'll lend you some.
- Ask some sts to report. ................................
- Listen and correct their work if
necessary.
- Check and give remarks.
5. Homework ( 1 min)
- Part B( page 81 - workbook)

D.P: 04/04/09 Period 88


D.T:07/04/09
TEST YOURSELF E

I. Objectives:
1. Aims: - Sts revise what they have learned in unit 12, unit 13 and unit 14.
2. Knowledge: - General knowledge in unit 12, unit 13 and unit 14.
- Language: pronunciation and grammar in the above units.
3. Skills: listening, speaking and writing.
II. Teaching aids: textbook, chalk, board.
III. Procedures:
Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Homework checking:( 5 mins)
- Ask one st to do Ex 4 in the workbook EX 4:
on the board. 2. It will look ....... 3. you
- Ask one st to give remarks. will like...
- Give remarks and marks. 4. you will get ....... 5.
They'll be....
6. we'll meet ..... 7. she'll
2. The new lesson:( 39 minutes) come......
- Ask sts to do part II, part III and part 8. I'll be..........
IV at home in advance to save time. - One st gives remarks.
- Give sts the time duration for each
part : part II: 10 minutes, part III: 10
minutes, part IV: 15 minutes.
- Ask sts to do listening in class.
2.1. Listening:
- Ask sts to read the requirement of the
task.
- Introduce new words:
+ 'Jupiter (n): Sao Méc - Look at the textbook and read the
+ senior citizen (n): ngêi giµ statements.
+ re'duce (v): gi¶m - Try to focus on the important
- Play the tape twice and ask sts to do words.
the task. - Copy down these words into their
- Ask sts to share their ideas with their notebooks.
partners. - Listen and read after the teacher.
- Get feedback and play the tape again

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page162 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
so that sts can check their answers. - Listen carefully and do the task.
- Ask other sts to give remarks. - Work in pairs to discuss their
- Check and give feedback. answers.
2.2. Reading: - Some sts report.
- Ask sts to work in groups to compare 1. 8.45 2. students
their answers. 3. Mountain 4. are reduced
5. 7.30

- Ask some sts to report his/ her - work in groups to share their ideas.
answers aloud. - Some sts stand up to report.
1.He/She has to do a lot of practice
and often spends a Saturday or
Sunday away from home.
2. They are often played on
- Listen and check. Saturdays and Sundays.
3. To play against other school
2.3. Grammar: teams.
2.3.1. 4. No. Sometimes parents, friends
- Ask sts to discuss their answers in and other students will travel with
groups. them.
- Ask some sts to report. 5. The whole school does....

- Ask two other sts to give remarks.


- Check and give the correct answers. - Discuss in groups.
2.3.2. to-infinitive: - Answers:
- Ask sts to share their answers with 1. 0 .................2. the ..............3.
their friends. 0............4. 0
- Ask 2 sts to write on the board. 5.the ..............6. a..................7.
the .........8. the
9. the .................10. a

- Compare their answers with their


parners.
- Write these sentences on the
board.
- Check and give remarks. 1. I stayed in to watch a film on T.V.
2.4. Writing: 2. I wrote them a letter to thank
- Ask some sts to read their writing them for the weekend.
aloud. 3. She went to university to study
egineering.
4. You should go to Britain to
- Ask some sts to give remarks. improve your English.
5. You should book your tickets well
in advance to see that football
match.
3. Homework: ( 1 min)
- Part A ( Page 80 - workbook) - Read their writing aloud
" The monitor of class 10G wishes to
announce that the musical
performance of class 10G to raise
money for the people in the flooded
areas will be held at 7.30 p.m on
Thursday, November 23rd in the
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page163 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
school meeting hall. The ticket price
is 5,000 VND."
- Listen to the teacher's remarks.

Forty five – minute test


I. Listening:
You are going to listen to a talk about Maximilian. Listen carefully and decide if the
following statements are true or false. Tick in the right box to indicate your answer. You
will listen to the tape twice.
T F
1. After leaving school, Maximilian worked on his
brother's farm.
2. He left the village when he was 18.
3. The ship he worked on was sailing to the UK.
4. He made a lot of money on Wall Street.
5. He became a millionaire when he was 35.
6. His first wife was a model.
7. He lives with his first wife now.
8. Both of his daughters have become drug addicts.
9. He loves travels and he has visited every country in
the world.
10 Neither he nor his brother is happy.

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page164 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
.
II. Reading:
Complete the following passage by choosing one of the given phrases to
fill in each blank.

a. was watched b. elimination rounds


c. organised by d. every four years e.
elimination tournaments f. host nation g. the sport's
governing body h. viewed and followed i. was held
k. the final tournament
World Cup is the most important competition in international football,
and the world's most reprentative team sport event. (1) ......................
Federation Internationale de Football Association (FIFA), (2)................., the
World Cup is contested by men's national football teams which are FIFA
members. The World Cup is held (3) ................... (except in times of war), but
the (4)................... of the competition (which narrows the field of as many as
197 teams down to the final 32 teams) take place over a three-year period,
using regional (5).....................
The (6) ............... phase (often called the "Finalists") involves 32 national
teams competing over a four-week period in a previously nominated
(7).................... Only seven nations have won the World Cup Finals. The most
recent football World Cup (8).................. in Germany between June 9 and July
10, 2006. The World Cup Finals is the most widely (9).................. sporting
event in the world. The final match of the 2002 World Cup (10).................. by
more than one billion people.
III. Writing:
Use the prompts below to make up complete sentences about Cher, a famous
American pop star.
1. Cher/ born/ May 20th, 1946/ El Centro/ the USA.
.........................................................................................................................................
................
2. She/ leave/ high school/ when/ she/ 16/ and/ go/ Los Angeles
.........................................................................................................................................
...................
3. She/ plan/ take/ acting lessons/ there.
.........................................................................................................................................
....................
4. However, she/ meet/ Salvatore Bono/ there/ and/ become/ famous singer/ when/ she/
only/ 19.
.........................................................................................................................................
..................
5. Cher/ get married/ twice/ and/ have/ a daughter/ a son.
.........................................................................................................................................
....................
6. 1977/ she/ decide/ turn/ acting/ again.
.........................................................................................................................................
....................
7. Cher/ win/ Best Actress/ the Cannes Film Festival/ 1985/ and/ Oscar/ 1987.
.........................................................................................................................................
....................
8. Her long career/ Cher/ be/ successful/ both/ serious actress/ pop star.

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page165 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
.........................................................................................................................................
....................
IV. Language Focus:
A. Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from
the others.
1. a. laugh b. photo c. orphan d. Stephen
2. a. because b. tense c. nose d. please
3. a. village b. engineer c. age d. game
4. a. team b. bread c. meat d. season
5. a. God b. globe c. phone d. host
B. Complete the second sentence so that it it has a similar meaning to the first
one.
1. He didn't return to his native village until the war ended.
It was
not........................................................................................................................................
...
2. We couldn't relax until all the guests had gone home.
It was
not .......................................................................................................................................
.....
3. I only recognized him when he came into the light.
It was not
until.....................................................................................................................................
4. Roger wants to buy a book, so he's gone to town.
Roger has
gone ................................................................................................................................
5. Jane wanted to earn some pocket money, so she got a part-time job.
Jane
got .......................................................................................................................................
.......
ANSWERS
I. Listening:
+ key: 1- F 2-T 3-F 4-T 5-F
6-T 7-F 8-F 9-F 10 - F
+Tape script:
When he left school, Maximilian also started work on the family farm. But he soon
became bored. Country life wasn't for him. And so at the age of 18 he left the village.
He's only been back three times since then. He went to Buenos Aires and there he got a
job on a ship that was sailing to the USA. On the ship he met a rich American
businessman. He liked Maximilian and offered him a job. Maximilian learnt quickly and in
the next ten years he made a lot of money on Wall Street. He became a millionaire when
he was only 25. Since then he has been part of the international jet set. He's had three
wives. When he was 30 he married a beautiful model, but she died two years later in a
car crash. His second and third marriages both ended in divorce. For the last ten years
he has lived alone in his luxury villa in the Bahamas. His family life has not been happy.
Two years ago his son went to prison. One of his two daughters has become a drug
addict. He's been on television several times and the newspapers have followed his life
closely. For the whole of his life he has loved to travel. He's visited almost every country
in the world. ' Yes, I've made a lot of money. I've been everywhere and I've done
everything. But has it made me happy? Not really. Now look at my brother, Emilio. For
several years his life hasn't changed at all. But he's happy. Yes, Emilio is a happy man.'
II. Reading:

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page166 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
(1) - c 2)- g (3) - d (4) - b (5)- e

(6) - k (7) - f (8) - i (9) - h (10) - a


III. Writing:
Use the prompts below to make up complete sentences about Cher, a famous
American pop star.
1. Cher was born on May 20th, 1946 in El Centro in the USA.
2. She left high school when she was 16 and went to Los Angeles.
3. She planned to take acting lessons there.
4. However, she met Salvatore Bono there and became a famous singer when she was
only 19.
5. Cher got married twice and has a daughter and a son.
6. In 1977 she decided to turn to acting again.
7. Cher won the Best Actress at the Cannes Film Festival in 1985 and an Oscar 1987.
8. In her long career Cher has been successful both as a serious actress and as a pop
star.
IV. Language Focus:
A. Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from
the others.
1.- d ; 2 - b; 3 - d; 4 - b ; 5 - a.
B. Complete the second sentence so that it it has a similar meaning to the first
one.
1. It was not until the war ended that he returned to his native village.
2. It was not until all the guests had gone home that we could relax.
3. It was not until he came into the light that I recognized him.
4. Roger has gone to town to buy a book.
5. Jane got a part-time job to earn some pocket money.
.................................................................................................
...................

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page167 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10

D.P: 10/04/09 Period 91


D.T:15/04/09
UNIT 15: CITIES
A. READING
I. Objectives:
1. Education aims: - Students know more about New York City.
2. Knowledge:
a. General knowledge: - Knowledge about New York City.
b. Language: - The passive.
- Vocabulary used to describe a city.
II. Teaching aids: board, textbook, chalk, some pictures.
III. Procedures:
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1. Warm-up:(3 mins)
- Ask sts some questions so that they can - Listen to the T and find the
find out which city they are reading about. answer.
What is the largest city in the USA? S1: New York City is the largest
Where is the Statue of Liberty situated? city in the USA.
- Introduce the topic of the lesson. S2: It is situated in New York.
2. Before you read:( 12 mins) - Listen to the T.
Aims: To introduce the topic and provide
sts with words/phrases about New York
City.
a. Answering questions:
- Ask sts to look at the pictures of some
well-known places in New York and then - Look at the pictures and answer
ask them some questions: the T.
Do you know these places? Ss: Yes, we know.
What are they? S1: No 1 is the Empire State
- Encourage sts to answer freely. Building.
- Guide sts to read the names of these S2: No 2 is the United Nations
places aloud. Headquarters.
- Ask them to match the names to the ...................
pictures. - Work in pairs to ask and answer.
- Ask sts to work in pairs to ask and - Give answers orally.
answer the questions in Before you read. 1. It is in the northeast of the
- Go round to help if necessary. USA.
- Ask some sts to give answers. 2. Sts' answer.
- Listen and check. Sts may give different ...................................
answers. b.Vocabulary. - Others listen
- Provide sts with the new words/phrases:
+ lo'cate (v): ®Æt ë
+ 'harbour (n):bÕn c¶ng - Listen and read after the T.
+ 'global (a): belong to globe

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page168 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
+ 'finance (n):tµi chÝnh
+ 'business (n):kinh doanh - Write down these words into
+' characterise(v):®Æc trng ho¸ their notebooks.
- Read each word/phrase 3 times and ask
sts to repeat it. - Listen and repeat.
- Leave sts 1 minute to self-practice.
- Ask 4-5 sts to read all the word/phrases - Read these words and check for
aloud in front of the class( 1 st/ 1 time) their partner.
- Listen and help sts to read the - Read the words aloud.
words/phrases correctly. - Listen to the T.
3. While you read:( 20 mins)
Aims: Read and guess the meanings of
the words from contexts, and find specific
information.
+ Task 1: Matching:
- Ask sts to read the passage
independently then read the words in
column A as well as the definitions given - Work individually.
in column B and scan the passage to
match.
- Tell sts to refer to Vocabulary for help
and encourage them try to guess the - Report their answers one by
meanings of the words in contexts of the one.
reading text. 1. - d 2-c 3 - e
- Ask sts to share their answers with their 4 -a 5-b
partners. - Listen to the T
- Call on 5 sts to read their answers aloud
in front of the class. - Read the sentences first and try
- Get feedback and give remarks. to focus on the key words.
+ Task 2: True or False. - Read the passage again and do
- Ask sts to read the sentences in task 2 the task.
first, and focus their attention on key - Share their ideas with their
words. friends.
- Ask sts to read the passage - Report their answers sentence
independently and then decide whether by sentence.
the statements are true or false. 1. T
- Tell sts to refer to Vocabulary for help 2. F. It is ice-free in all seasons.
and encourage them to try to scan the 3. T. It is on the Hudson &
information as fast as possible. Passaic River.
- Move round to help and ask sts to share 4. T
their ideas and correct the false 5. T
sentences. - Listen to the T
- Call on 5 sts to read and explain their
answers aloud in front of the class. - Read the passage again and
work in pairs to ask and answer.
- Feedback and give remarks. - Present their ideas:
+ Task 3: 1. It's in the southeastern part of
- Ask sts to read the passage again and New York state.
work in pairs to ask and answer the 2. 7 million in the city and 19
questions. million in the metropolitan
- Move around to help. region.
- Ask sts to share the answers with their 3. Because it was founded by the
friends Dutch.
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page169 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
- Ask 5 pairs to give answers. ...............................
- Listen and check. - Listen to their friends and the T.
4. After you read:( 9 mins)
Aims: to test sts' understanding about the
reading passage.
- Ask sts to work in groups of three or four - Work in groups orally.
to discuss two questions.
If you could visit New York, which place(s)
of interest there would you like to see?
Why?/ Why not?
- Go round to help sts with their work. - Some sts report.
- Some presentatives of the groups are
required to report in front of the class.
- Listen and help sts to give correct - Listen to the T.
answers.
5. Homework:( 1 min)
- Write a paragraph to answer the
questions in After you read.
D.P: 11/04/09 Period 92
D.T:16/04/09
UNIT 15: CITIES
B. SPEAKING

I. Objectives:
- Students can talk about the differences between London and New York.
- Asking and answering questions about the two cities.
- Making the comparisions between London and New York..
II. Teaching aids: Textbook, chalk, board, handouts.
IV. Procedures:
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1. Warm- up: (5 minutes)
Aims : get used to the topic.
- Divide the class into 2 big groups and
introduce the quiz: T is going to read out the - Work in groups and find the
questions about Hanoi and Ho Chi Minh City. answers quickly.
Sts need to listen and give the answers
quickly.
- The quiz: 1. Ho CHi Minh City. ( Area of
1. Which city is larger in area- Hanoi or Ho HCM: 2,095 km2, Hanoi: 921
Chi Minh City? km20
2. Which city has a bigger population- Hanoi 2. Ho Chi Minh City. ( pop. Of
or Ho Chi Minh City? HCM: 6. 2 milion, Hanoi: 3
3. Which city is older- Hanoi or Ho Chi Minh milion)
City? 3. Hanoi ( founded in 1010)
2. Before you speak: (8 minutes) -Listen to the T
+ Task 1: Complete each question in A with - Work individually.
a suitable word in B - Some S write on board
- Ask S to do the task individually. - Answers:
- Ask some S to go and write their answers on 1-d 2- f 3- a-e
the board. 4-a-e 5- b-c 6- c-

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page170 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
- Get feedback. b.
3. While you speak: (20 minutes)
Aims: Sts can ask and asnwer about the two
cities .
+ Task 2: - Work in pairs to ask and
- Ask sts to work in pairs: One S read the answer.
infformation about New York city and the S1: Do you know when NY was
other about London, then ask and asnwer founded?
about the cities S2: It was founded in 1624.
- In their pairs, Ss will take turn to ask and
And what about London?
answer about New York and London using the S1: It was founded in 43AD.
questions in Task 1. Ans what is the population of
- Go around to check and offer help. New York?
- Ask sts to share their answers with other S2: 7 milion. What about
pairs. London?
- Call on some pairs to perform in front of the
S1: 7 milion, too. What’s the
class and give feedback. area of New York?
- Listen and give remarks. S2: It covers an area of 946
km2. And how large is
+ Task 3: London?
- Introduce the task: S are going to work in ............................................
pairs again and compare the two cities they .......
have just asked and answer about. .
- Call on two students to read aloud the
model conversation in the textbook. - Read the model aloud.
- Pay attention to the words and phrases
printed in bold and review the comparative - Pay attention to the words/
forms of Adjs and nouns: phrases in bold.
a Equal Comparison - Listen to the T and take
+ Structure: notes.
S + Modal V/Aux V/Be
S + V + as adj / NP
adv as + Pro

- Equal comparison of nouns:


......... as+ many/ few+ countable N+ as
..........as+ much/ little+
uncountable N+ as
Eg.: as many parks as/ as much money as
b Comparative form:
+ Structure:
S + Modal
S+V+ comparative adj V/Aux V/Be
/adv +than+ NP
Pro
- Comparative nouns: more + count/
uncount - N - Work in pairs.
E.g: more buildings, more money - Compare the two cities.
- Ask S to work in pairs to compare the two - Some pairs present in front

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page171 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
cities, basing on the model conversation. of the class.
- Go around to help Sts.
- Ask some Sts to perform in front of the
class.
4. After you speak: (10 minutes)
Aim: S can talk about the preferences and
give the reasons.
+ Task 4:
- Introduce the task: S are going to work in
groups to talk about their preferences and to
- Work in groups to listen and
give reasons to back up their opinions. take notes their opinions into
- Ask S to draw this table and take notes of
the table.
their friends’ opinions . - some sts present:
Name City preferred Reasons E.g.:Hoa prefers New York to
London because people are
friendlier and opener. Binh
prefers living in London
- Go around to observe and offer help if because there are more high
necessary. buildings but Nga prefers
- Call some S to report their findings. working in London because
- Give corrective feedback. there are more holidays ……

5. Homework: (2 minutes )
Write a paragraph about New York and
London.

D.P: 11/04/09 Period 93


D.T:
UNIT 15: CITIES
C.LISTENING
I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to get the specific information about
the Statue of Liberty
II.Method: Integrated, mainly communicative
III.Teaching aids: pictures of the Statue of Liberty, some pictures of some
famous cities, lesson plan, textbook
IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’activities


Warm up: (3minutes) Matching:
- Uses a poster: Match the names
of the cities in column A with the - Go to the board and match the
names of the countries in column words
B
- Corrects
* Pre-listening (6minutes) Ss’answers may vary
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page172 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
- Gets Ss to work in pairs to 1. It is the Statue of Liberty
answer 6 questions in textbook 2. It is the Statue of a woman /It
is tall/ It is big
3. It got a crown in her head
4. It’s got a tablet in her left
hand
* While-listening (23minutes) 5. It’s holding a burning torch
+ Task 1. 6. It’s wearing a robe
- Explains the instruction and
has Ss read the task quickly in
1 minute before listening - Read the task quickly
- Plays the tape twice
- Listen and choose the correct
answers

Answer key:
- Listens to Ss’answers(from 1- 1. B
5) and get Ss to listen the last 2. A
time to make sure that they 3. B
can correct their answers by 4. A
themselves. 5. C
- Give their answers
+ Task 2 - Listen again to correct their
- Explains the instruction answers
- Gets Ss to read quickly Task 2
in 1 minute -Listen to teacher’s explanation
- Plays the tape twice - Read the task quickly

- Listen to the tape and fill in the


- Asks Ss what they have table
heard.
- Listens to Ss’answers
- Plays the tape the last time to - Give their answers
make sure that Ss can fill in the
table enough with correct - Listen to the tape and correct
information the answers

Answer key
1. Liberty Enlightening the
World
2. 46 meters
3. 205 tons
4. Copper (outside) and iron
(frame)

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page173 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
* Post- listening (13minutes) 5. (Made of) stone and
- Divides the class into 2 concrete
groups 6. 9.30 a.m to 5 p.m daily
- Has the students sit in groups (everyday) except
of six and retell their friends Christmas Day
what they have learnt about
the Statue of Liberty, using the - Work in groups
information in the table. - 2 Ss present their talks in front
- Goes around to help students of class
- Gets 2 representatives of two
groups to present their talks - Other Ss listen to their friends’
- Gives feedback presentation
Homework
Assigns homework Write a paragraph (about 50
words) about the Statue of
Comment Liberty
D.P: /04/09 Period 94
D.T:
UNIT 15: CITIES
D. WRITING
I. OBJECTIVES :
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to write a paragraph
describing a city.
II. KNOWLEDGE :
* General knowledge : students learn how to describe a city
* Language : - Grammar :
+ Defining and non defining relative clauses
+ Simple present, simple past.
- Vocabulary :
+ Some new words related to the topic
III. Teaching aids : pictures, texbook.
IV. PROCEDURE :

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities


I. Warm up : (3’)
- asks some questions Answer
1. What do you know about (individually)
London?
2. Do you like it? Give reason(s)
II. Pre - writing : (15’)
- asks students to look at the - Work in groups, discuss, and
pictures in the texbook answer the questions in task 1
- asks students to read paragraph
in silence.
- goes around class to help - Answers
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page174 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
students 1. In southern English, on river
- explains some structures when thames
describing a city 2. It covers an are a of 1,610
+ (be) situated sguare kilometres
+ cover an area of 3. 7 million
+ (be) founded by translatio 4. It is a capital city
n
+ (be) famous for 5. It was founded by the roman
+ The best thing about …… is in 43AD
…… 6. It is famous for many
things : such as St paul’s
cathedral and the houses of
parliament, its museums and
its many shops
7. The best thing about London
is the park
- Gives feedback
III. While - writing : (15’)
- Elicits 2 famous cities - Give the name of two famous
Give cues cities
* HCM city : - Population – about
8 million
people
- Area : 2,092
square km
- Founded :
1968
- Famous :
BenThanh market, Duc Ba church.
* CanTho : - Population - about 2
million people
- Area : 2,964
square km
- Founded : 2004
- Famous:NinhKieupier,Canhoport
- asks students some questions
about each of them (questions in
task 1) - work in groups to write about
- asks students to write a a city of their interest
paragraph to describe one of the
two above cities (based on
questions in task 1) by using - exchange their writings and
posters. correct them each other
- Goes around class to help
students
- asks ss to exchange their
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page175 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
writings
- goes around tohelp them if
necessary
- asks one student in each group
to stick the posters on the board
IV. Post - writing : (11’)
- corrects mistakes
- T & ss work together - correct
V. Homework : (1’) - do the work at home.
- asks students to write a short
paragraph about the province of
Ben Tre

D.P: /04/09 Period 95


D.T:
UNIT 15: CITIES
E. LANGUAGE FOCUS
I.Objectives:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to pronounce two sounds /θ/, / ð /
correctly; use “ Non- defining and defining Relative Clauses” and “ Although” correctly
II. Skills : listening, speaking, readings , writing.
III. Teaching aids: pictures, posters, lesson plan, textbook, etc.
IV. Proceture

Teacher, s activities Students’ s activities


.
Pronuciation(12mns)
-There are three brothers in Tom’s
family. -read in chorus.
/θ / /ð/ -pronounce the sounds in chorus
- asks students to read this sentence in
chorus.
- asks them to pronounce two sounds:
- describe how to pronounce the 2
sounds clearly. Who, whom, that ,which,…
A. Exercise 1
Non-defining and defining relative
clauses.
Relative pro: which, who, whom, It is New York Harbour
whose,that.
Activity 1:
Shows a picture of New York Harbour
(textbook)
Asks: What is it?.
*Says: New York Harbour, which is ice-
free in
N–R

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page176 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
- Clause
all seasons, is one of the largest and “Who lives next door” is relative
finest harbours in the world. clause
- Writes this sentence on the blackboard
- explain -
.
Gives another example. Work individually
*The man who lives next door is very Correct in pairs
friendly. Answers:
-explains. 1.Washington, D.C., which is located
Theory: Mñeà quan heä giôùi haïn on the East Coast of the United
(defining relative clause) cung caáp States, has many interesting and
thoâng tin raát caàn thieát. Ñeå ñaûm historical places to visit.
baûo nghóa cuûa caâu, ta khoâng theå 2. Brasilia, which is the capital of
boû meänh ñeà naøy. Brazil, is less than 50 years old.
@ Note 3.Mexico City, which has a
“That” is not used in non-defining rela population of nearly 20,000,000, is
clauses the largest metropolitan area in the
Activity 2. world.
Do exercise 1: 4. Seoul, which hosted the 1988
Gives the instruction. Summer Olympics, is well-known for
Asks students to work individually its shopping centres.
Gets students to correct in pairs. 5. Kyoto, which used to be the
Gets some sts to do this exercise before capital of Japan, has many temples.
the class.
Correct It is raining
They are playing football
B.Exercise 2
Connecting contrasting ideas:
Although.
Activity 1

Gives an example
Asks questions: It …… Answers:
What are they doing? 1. Although there is not much to do
Says: Although it is raining,they’re still in the countryside, I prefer living in
playing football. S V there.
Writes this sentence on the b.b 2. Although there is a lot of
Explains pollution in Los Angeles, it is an
Asks ss to look at the example in their ideal place to live.
textbooks 3. Although the shops are crowded,
Ex: Although New York is not the capital people are not buying much.
of the 4. Although the city is a favourite
S V tourist destination for many people,
U.S.A, it is the home of the United it has its problems.
Nations. 5. Although it is a safe
-analyses neighbourhood, it is best to be
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page177 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
-explains careful
Theory: Although ( maëc duø) laø moät
lieân töø duøng ñeå noái hai meänh ñeà Do the exercises again
coù nghóa traùi ngöôïc nhau trong moät
caâu. Sau Although ta duøng meänh ñeà.
@ notes
_Although = Even though= Though
ex: Though it is raining, they’re still
playing football.
Activity 2.
Do exercise 2
Gives the instruction
Asks students to work individually
-gets them to correct in pairs
-corrects
Homework:
Teacher assigns homework.
Comments.

D.P: 02 /05/09 Period 96


D.T:05/05/09
Unit 16: Historical places
A.READING
I. Objectives:
- Reading for general ideas and specific information.
- Choosing the best suitable words and guessing in context.
- Deciding on True or False statements.
- Discussing in group.
II. Teaching aids: - Textbook, blackboard, chalk, ...….
III. Procedure
Teacher’s activities Students’
activities
1. Warm-up: Network..(5minutes)
- Ask students to work in groups of 3-4 students .
- Ask the students to name some historical places in - Work in groups
Vietnam.
- After 2 minutes, the group which has the longest list
will be the winner
2. Before you read: (8 minutes)
Aims: To provide students with words/phrases about
historical places.
- Students are required to work in pairs to answer the
questions in the textbook. - Work in pairs.
- Go around to offer help S.
- Ask some S to answer the questions.
- Listen and help S to give correct answers.
Suggested answers:
1. Co Loa Citadel. Hoa Lu Capital. Con- Son- Kiep Bac - Some S answer the
Site. Den Hung Remains, Quang Tri Citadel, Hue Imperial questions
City. Hoi An City, etc.

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page178 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
2. Yes, it is. It is the first university of Vietnam.
3. Van Mieu- Quoc Tu Giam was founded in 1070 by the
Ly Dynastry. It is one of the most visited places in Hanoi.
- Give S some new words:
* The new words/phrases are:
+ Confucian ( a): ngêi theo ®¹o Khæng, nhµ nho
+ engrave ( v): kh¾c, tr¹m træ
+ stelae ( n): bia ®¸ - Read after the T
+ banyan trees ( n): c©y ®a and then read
+ tortoise ( n): con rïa individually.
Read each word/phrase 3 times and ask the students to - Listen and take
repeat it. notes
Ask 4-5 students to read all the word/phrases aloud in
front of the class (1 student/ 1 time)
Listen and help the students to read the words/phrases -
correctly.
3. While you read: (20 minutes)
Aims: Read for information to do the task, and do the
tasks.
Task 1: Guesing in context
- Ask the students to read the passage indepently then
find the italicised words in task 1.
- Write these words on board:
Originally, representative, memorialise, engrave,
flourish.
- Ask S to go back to the text to locate and underline - Work individually
these words and try to guess the meanings. - Some S do the task
- T might want to check that S understand all these orally while others
words by callingon some S to tell the meanings in listen.
Vietnamese.
- S are required to compare their answers with their
partner.
- Call on students to read and explain their answers
aloud in front of the class.
- Feedback and give correct answers:
* Key:
1. b 2. a 3. c 4. b 5. c - Read the text and
Task 2: Deciding on True or False statement do the task
- Ask S read the text more carefully and decide individually
whether the statements are true (T) or false (F). Correct - Check the answers
the false information. with a partner.
- Ask s to do the task individually and then check their
answers with their friend. - Some S present.
- Ask some representatives to give their choice orally in
front of the class and explain their answers.
- Listen and help S to give the right answer.
Answer:
1. F ( it was built in 1070)
2. T

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page179 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
3. F ( from 11th century to 18th century)
4. F ( it is an example of well- preseved traditional -
Vietnamese architecture)
5. T
6. T
4. After you read: (10 minutes)
Aims: S can talk briefly about Van Mieu- Quoc Tu Giam.
- Ask S to work in groups of 3 or 4 and prepare a talk
about Van Mieu- Quoc Tu Giam, using the suggestions in
the textbook. - Listen to the T
- Go round to help the students with their work. - Work in groups
- Ask some S to talk in front of the class and give - S take turn to talk
feedback. about Van Mieu-
Suggested talk: Quoc Tu Giam.
Van Mieu- Quoc Tu Giam is a historical and cultural
relic of Vietnam, which attracts a great number of
visitors every year. Van Mieu- Quoc Tu Giam was built
originally by the Ly dynasty in 1070 in Hanoi. Quoc Tu
Giam was considered the first university of Vietnam,
which was established on the grounds of Vietnam. Royal
exams used to take place here and the first comers
were honoured by having their names carved on the
stone stelae. These talae were carried on the backs of
giant tortoises, which can still be seen today.
5. Homework: (2 minutes)
- Write a passage about Van Mieu- Quoc Tu Giam.

D.P: 02 /05/09 Period 97


D.T: /05/09

Unit 16: Historical places


B.SPEAKING
I/ Objectives
- Asking and answering questions about a historical place.
- Talking about historical places.
II/ Teaching aids:
Textbook, chalk, board, handouts.
III/ Procedure:
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1. Warm- up: (5 minutes)
Aims : get used to the topic.
- Introduce the game: You are going to work in groups - Work in group.
to match the names of different historical places of
interest in Hanoi with their English translatations. - Give the answers.:
1. Chïa Mét Cét a. Presidential Palace
2. Cét Cê Hµ Néi b. Temple of Literature 1-e 2- h 3- i
3. B¶o tµng C¸ch c. Ho Chi Minh Mausoleum 4- b 5- c 6- a
m¹ng 7- d 8- j 9- f

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page180 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
4. V¨n MiÕu d. National Museum of 10- e
Ethnology
5. L¨ng Hå Chñ TÞch e. Co Loa Citadel
6. Phñ chñ TÞch f. National Museum of Fine
Arts
7. B¶o tµng D©n g. One Pillar Pagoda
téc häc
8. B¶o tµng LÞch sö h. Flag Tower of Hanoi
9. B¶o tµng Mü i. Revolution Museum
thuËt
10. Thµnh Cæ Loa j. Vietnamese National History
Museum
- Go around to observe and check that S work.
- Check with the whole class.
2. Before you speak: (8 minutes)
Aims: : focus sts. on the topic and introduce the words - read the fact sheet
and grammar used in the task. and listen to the T.
Task 1: Ask and answer about President Ho Chi
Minh Mausoleum.
- Ask S to study the fact sheet of the
monuments and explain new words if any. - Read the model
+ stand : place conversation.
+ late( adj): nguyªn, cè cùu - Answer the teacher’s
+ maintenance ( n): b¶o dìng questions.
- Ask S to read the model conversation in the - Work in pairs.
textbook. - Some pairs present in
- Ask S some questions as examples. front of the class.
- Ask S to work in pairs to ask and answer about
President Ho Chi Minh’s Mausoleum.
- Go around to help S.
- Call on some pairs to perform in front of the class.
Suggested questions:
+ Where is it located?
+ When did the construction start?
+ When did the constuction finish?
+ How many floors are there?
+ What is the use of each floor?
+ What time is it open?
+ What time is it closed?
+ Is photography allowed inside?
3. While you speak: (20 minutes) - Listen and take notes.
Aims: Sts can ask and asnwer about the two historical
places .
Task 2: An information gap activity
- Introduce the task: S going to ask and answer about
Hue Imperial City and Thong Nhat Conference Hall.
- Give S some new words:
+ World Cultural Heritage:Di s¶n v¨n ho¸ thÕ giíi
+ Comprise (v): bao gåm

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page181 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
+ The Royal Citadel: Hoµng thµnh
+ The Imperial Enclosure: Thµnh néi
+ The Forbidden Purple City: Tö cÊm thµnh
+ Admission: gi¸ vÐ vµo cöa
+ Reunification Hall: Dinh Thèng nhÊt
+ To be heavily damaged: bÞ ph¸ huû nÆng nÒ
+ Air bombardment: nÐm bom
+ Chamber: phßng
- Ask S to work in pairs
- In their pairs, Ss will take turn to ask and answer
about two histirical places using the questions in task
1.
- Go around to check and offer to help.
- Call on some pairs to perform in front of the class
and give feedback.

4. After you speak: (10 minutes)


Aim: S can talk about the historical place they have
been to.
Task 3:
- Introduce the task: S are going to work in groups to
ask and answer questions about a historical place
they have been to.
- Remind S to take notes of their friends’ talk while
listening so that they can report in front of the class.
- Go around to help S .
- Call some S to report their findings.
- Give corrective feedback.
5. Homework: (2 minutes )
Write a paragraph to talk about a historical place .

D.P: 05 /05/09 Period 98


D.T: /05/09

Unit 16: Historical places


C.LISTENING
I. OBJECTIVES:
To help Ss listen and understand about Hoi An, a historical place in Vietnam (listening
for specific information).
II.TEACHING AIDS: text book,cassette
III. PROCEDURE:
1. Settlement: Checking attendance
2. Checking: New words
3. New lesson: Listening
Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities
* Warm up: Guess the word Group work
- Have Ss play the game "Guess the word"
(A word consists of 11 letters with some available.) Key: DESTINATION
D I O N
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page182 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
- T gives some cues: + This word has 11 letters.
+ It begins with a letter D.
+ It ends with the suffix -ION.
- T asks some lead-in questions:
1. Do you know about the world cultural heritage sites Hue, Ha long Bay, Hoi An, Phong
in Vietnam? Nha, My Son
2. Can you name the one in Middle Vietnam, its name
begins with an H and ends with an N? Hoi An
1. Before you listen:
a. Have Ss look at the pictures in textbooks and answer Individual work
the questions: Key:
- What is the name of the place? Pic 1: Notre Dame Cathedral in Ho
- What places have you been to? Chi Minh City
- Which one would you like to visit most and why? Pic 2: Bo Nau Grotto, Ha Long Bay
b. Vocabulary: Pic 3: The Huc Bridge, Hoan Kiem
- tile-roofed (a) → picture : mái ngói Lake, Ha noi
- well-preserved (a) → Example : được bảo quản tốt Pic 4: Ngo Mon Gate, Imperial City
- carve (v) → picture : khắc in Hue.
- construct (v) → explanation : xây dựng Copy down
2. While you listen:
a. Task 1(textbook): Listen and choose A, B or C that
best completes the sentences: Pair work
- Have Ss work in pairs
- Have Ss read the MCQ for a few minutes. Guess the answer
- Have Ss guess the answers.
- Have Ss listen the text twice. Listen to the tape
- Have Ss discuss the answers in pairs. Key:
- T gives feedback 1. B 2. A 3. C
4. C 5.C
b. Task 2 (textbook): Listen and answer the following Group works
questions
- T divides the class into groups of 4 .
- The text is divided into 2 parts:
Part 1: " The ancient town ...................designers"
Part 2: "One of the main ...................... Cultural
Heritage site"
- T turns on the part 1, asks the groups to listen and Ss listen twice.
answer the questions 1→ 4. - Key:
- T does the same for the part 2. 1. Its lies on the Thu Bon River, 30
- Have Ss listen the whole text for checking. km south of Da Nang.
- T gives feedbacks. 2. It was known as the major trading
centre in Southeast Asia between the
16th and 17th centuries.
3. Hoi An is now famous for its old
temples, pagodas, small tile-roofed
houses and narrow streets.
4. They were made of wood and
their pillars were carved with
ornamental designs.

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page183 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
5. It is 153 years old.
6. It was built nearly two centuries
ago.
7. The house now looks almost
exactly as it did in the early 19th
century.
3. After you listen: 8. In 1999.
- Have Ss work in 3 groups to talk about the ancient
town of Hoi An, using the following cues: Group work
• its location and roles in the past
• its attractive characteristics at present
• its main tourist attractions and their features

IV. Consolidation:
V. Homework: Prepare "Writing" p.174 in textbook.

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page184 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10

D.P: 07 /05/09 Period 99


D.T: /05/09

Unit 16: Historical places


D.WRITING
I. Objectives:
1. Education Aims: - Students can describe a chart.
2. Knowledge:
a. General knowledge: - Student knows how to read the information in a chart.
b. Language: - Language used to describe a chart.
- The past tenses.
3. Skills: - Reading: read the model description.
- Speaking: discuss in pairs.
- Writing: write a description.
II. Anticipated problems:
- Students are not familiar with this type of writing.
III. Teaching Aids: - board, textbook, chalk.
IV. Procedures:
Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Homework checking :( 5 mins)
- Ask one st to talk about the ancient town - Listen to their friend and give
of Hoi An. remarks.
- Ask other sts to listen to their friend and
give remarks. - Listen to the teacher.
- Check and give remarks.
2. Before you write:( 20 mins)
- Aims: to get sts to know how to write a
description of a chart.
+ Task 1:
- Firstly, ask sts to look at the chart and
explain the information in the chart. - Read the chart and try to
- Ask them to look at the chart and then understand the information in the
answer the questions in pairs. chart.
- Move around to help if necessary. - Work in pairs to ask and answer
- Ask sts to compare their answer with and then share their answer with
other pairs. their friends.
- Present their ideas.
1. The USA had the biggest
number of visitors to Vietnam in
2001.
2. 99,700 visitors.
3. Australia did.
4. No, it isn't.
- Get feedback and give remarks. 5. France did.
- Introduce some useful words/expressions 6. The number of American visitors
that sts can use when describing a chart. to Vietnam in 2002 increased by
+ Beginning: Answer the question: " What 29,497 in comparison with that in
does the chart show?" 2001.
- Answer: The chart shows................. - Listen to the teacher.
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page185 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
The chart presents some
information ....
+Expressions: As we can see from the
chart, .............
It can be seen from the - Copy down these words into their
chart that ......... notebooks.
According to the
chart, .................
+ Verbs: increase >< decrease
reduce, rise, .....
+ Adverbs: rapidly, quickly, sharply,
steadily, etc.
+ Comparatives and superlatives.
3. While you write:( 10 mins)
- Aims: Sts practise describing the chart.
+ Task 2: - Do the writing task.
- Ask sts to write a description of the
chart.
- Ask them to use the answers to the
questions above to write. - Read their writing: ( a model
- Let sts write in 10 minutes. description)
- Move around to conduct the activity. " The chart shows the number of
4. After you write:( 9 mins) visitor arrivals to Vietnam from the
Aims: to get feedback and check sts' USA, France and Australia in 2001
work. and 2002. The statistics were
- Get feedback by asking some sts to read provided by Vietnam National
their work aloud. Administration of Tourism. It is
- Ask some other sts to give remarks. clear from the chart that the
- Check and give the correct answer. number of visitors to Vietnam from
- If there is enough time, T can have sts the USA, France and Australia in
exchange their writing among sts within a 2002 is higher than that in 2001.
group so that they can check their friend's According to the chart, the USA
work and give remarks. had the biggest number of visitors
to Vietnam with 230,470 visitors in
2001 and 259,967 in 2002. France
ranked second with 99,700 visitors
in 2001 and 111,546 in 2002.......
5. Homework: ( 1min) "
- Part D (page 95 - workbook).

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page186 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10

D.P: 09 /05/09 Period 100


D.T: /05/09

Unit 16: Historical places


E.LANGUAGE FOCUS
I. Objectives:
Students know how to pronounce the sound /ʒ / and / ʃ / correctly.
- Students revise: - Comparatives and superlatives.

.
II. Anticipated problems:
- Students may forget the knowledge about comparisons.
III. Teaching aids: - board, chalk, textbook.
IV. Procedures:
Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Homework checking: ( 5mins)
- Ask two sts to read the description of the - Two sts read the announcements
chart they wrote at home aloud. aloud.
- Ask another st to give remarks.
- Check and give marks. - Give remarks.
2. Pronunciation:( 10 mins) - Listen to the teacher.
- Aims: to introduce two sounds /ʒ / and /
ʃ / and help sts to practise these sounds.
a. Write two sounds on the board and
pronounce them clearly twice, then ask sts
to repeat. - Write down two sounds.
- Tell sts how to pronounce these sounds - Listen to the teacher and repeat.
accurately. - Look at the book , listen and
/ ʃ / : a voiceless sound repeat.
/ ʒ / : a voiced sound /ʒ/ /ʃ/
- Ask sts to pay attention to the length of television shop
two sounds. pleasure machine
- Ask them to look at the textbook, listen measure Swedish
and repeat. ...........................
- Read these words in pairs and
- Then ask sts to work in pairs to read the check for their partners.
words again so that they can check for
each other.
- Move around to help . - Look at the book and work in
- Ask two sts to read again and give pairs.
remarks. - Answers:
b. Ask sts to look at sentences in page /ʒ/ /ʃ/
175 in the book. pleasure
- Ask them to work in pairs to read the shouldn't
sentences and then find out the words Asia shop
illusions washing
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page187 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
containing sound /ʒ / and sound / ʃ / . ...............................
- Ask them to work in 2 minutes. - Read the sentences.
- Move around to conduct the activity.
- Ask one st to report and other sts to give
remarks.
- Check and give the correct answers.
- Ask some sts to read these sentences
aloud.
- Listen and give remarks.
3. Grammar: ( 29 mins)
Aims: to revise comparatives and - Listen to the T.
superlatives, and making comparisons, - Look at the examples.
and have sts do EX1,EX2 and EX3. - One st tells the T the comparative
a. Comparatives and superlatives: and superlative form of the
- Firstly ask sts to look at the examples adjectives:
and revise the comparative and Adjectives Comparatives
superlative form of the adjectives. Superlatives
E.g: My house is smaller than your house. Short adjs .....- er
My house is the smallest in this the .....- est
street. long longer
Exercise 1 is more difficult than the longest
exercise 2. hot hotter
Exercise 1 is the most difficult in the hottest
this book. .... ..... .
- Ask sts to tell the T the comparative and ........
superlative form of the adjectives. Long adjs more .....
- Listen to the S and give remarks. the most ....
- Notes: expensive more expensive
Irregular adjs the most ex.
good => better => the ....... .......... ..
best .........
bad => worse => the
worst
far => further/farther => the
furthest/farthest - Some sts report.
- Ask sts to do EX 1. 1. young => younger => the
+ Exercise 1: youngest
- Ask sts to do Ex 1 in pairs and then share2. happy => happier => the
the answers with their friends. happiest
- Move round to help if necessary. 3. big => bigger => the
- Ask some pairs to report. biggest
4. busy => busiest => the
- Check and give remarks. busiest
...................................
+ Exercise 2: - Listen and correct their work if
- Ask sts to read the requirement and the necessary.
example carefully.
- Ask sts to do the Ex individually. - Read the requirement and the
- Move round to help if necessary. example carefully.
- Ask sts to share their ideas with their - Do the Ex individually.
friends. 2. My sister is younger than me.
- Ask two sts to write the sentences on the 3. Who is the oldest in the class?
board. 4. Concord used to be the fastest
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page188 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
- Ask other sts to give remarks. passenger plane in the world.
.................................
- Listen to the teacher.
b. Making comparisons:
- Ask sts to EX3.
+ Exercise 3:
- Ask sts to do Ex3 in pairs and then share - Do the exercise in pairs.
the answers with their friends. - Some sts report:
- Move round to help if necessary. 1. v 2. so 3.
- Ask some sts to report in front of the more
whole class. 4. the 5. the 6.
v
7. than 8. of 9.
- Check and give remarks. v
5. Homework ( 1 min) ................................
- Part B( page 91 - workbook) - Listen and correct their work if
necessary.

D.P: 02 /05/09 Period 101


D.T: /05/09

TEST YOURSELF F
I. Objectives:
- Sts revise what they have learned in unit 15 and unit 16.
- General knowledge in unit 15 and unit 16.
- Language: pronunciation and grammar in the above
units.
II. Teaching aids: textbook, chalk, board.
III. Procedures:
Teacher's Students'
activities activities
1. Homework checking:( 5
mins) EX 4:
- Ask one st to do Ex 4 in the 3. larger 4. the longest
workbook on the board. 5. the worst
- Ask one st to give remarks. 6. happier 7. the most
popular
- Give remarks and marks. ...........................
2. The new lesson:( 39 - One st gives remarks.
minutes)
- Ask sts to do part II, part III
and part IV at home in advance
to save time.
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page189 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
- Give sts the time duration for
each part : part II: 10 minutes,
part III: 10 minutes, part IV: 15
minutes.
- Ask sts to do listening in - Look at the textbook and
class. read the statements.
2.1. Listening: - Listen carefully and do the
- Ask sts to read the task.
requirement of the task. - Work in pairs to discuss their
- Play the tape twice and ask sts answers.
to do the task. - Some sts report.
- Ask sts to share their ideas 1. three 2. friends
with their partners. 3. capital
- Get feedback and play the 4. crowds 5. noisy
tape again so that sts can 6. interesting
check their answers. ............................
- Ask other sts to give remarks.
- Check and give feedback. - work in groups to share their
2.2. Reading: ideas.
- Ask sts to work in groups to - Some sts stand up to report.
compare their answers. 1. C 2. A 3. A 4. A
- Ask some sts to report his/ her 5. A
answers aloud.
- Listen and check.
2.3. Grammar: - Discuss in groups.
2.3.1. Non-defining Relative - Answers:
Clauses: 1. Their house, which is quite
- Ask sts to discuss their big and modern, ....
answers in groups. 2. The new English teacher,
- Ask some sts to write on the who I met yesterday, .....
board. 3. Sandra has got a new job
with Capital Insurers, which is
a much .....
..................................
- Ask two other sts to give ........
remarks.
- Check and give the correct - Compare their answers with
answers. their parners.
- Answers:
1. bigger 2.
2.3.2. Comparisons: best
- Ask sts to share their answers 3. better 4.

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page190 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
with their friends. more polluted
- Ask some sts to report:. 5. more stressful

- Read their writing aloud


- Check and give remarks. "Taipei, which is the capital
2.4. Writing: city of Taiwan, was founded
- Ask some sts to read their in the 18th century. It has a
writing aloud. population of 2.3 million. It is
the country's most exciting
city, but the weather there is
- Ask some sts to give remarks. very humid and not very
pleasant. Taipei is a busy city,
and the streets are always full
of people. It is famous for
3. Homework: ( 1 min) excellent museums."
- Part A ( Page 85 - workbook) - Listen to the teacher's
remarks.

D.P: 05 /05/09 Period 102


D.T: /05/09

REVIEW
***
A. OBJECTIVES:
I. Knowledge: Students revise conditional sentences
II. Skills: Speaking, writing, reading
B. PROCEDURE:
I. Settlement: Checking attendance
II. Checking: Who is absent today?
III. New lesson: Lesson 1
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
I- Revision: Activity 1: Group work
- Teacher gives examples and asks: “What tenses are - Sts discuss the form, use of the first, second
used in the second and in the third conditional and the third conditional sentences.
sentences?” - Students answer the question: the simple

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page191 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
present tense, the simple future, the past
perfect and past future perfect tenses
- The leader writes down on the board
Ex: If I were a bird, I would be a while pigeon. * The second conditional sentence:
(I’m sorry I can’t be a bird) If clause Main clause
S + simple S + should/would/ could
past tense + infinitive
If I had studied harder, I would have passed the exam. * The third conditional sentence:
(I failed the exam, because I didn't study hard enough) If clause Main clause
- Teacher notes: S + would/ could/ might
+ If the "if" clause comes first, a comma is usually used. S + had + PP have + PP
If the "if" clause comes second, there is no need for a
comma.
+ We use WERE for the verb TOBE in the second - Sts give some more examples
conditional sentence.
II- Practice:
Exercise 1: Complete the sentences with the verbs in
parentheses. Activity 2: Pair work
1. There would be less crime if everyone (have) ......... - Students do practice in pairs
a job. Expecting answer
2. If I (not, go) ....... out so late last night, I (not be, 1. had
punish) .............. 2. had not gone/ wouldn’t have been
3. I (meet) ...... my old friend in the party yesterday if I punished
(not, leave) .......... so early. 3. would have met/ hadn’t left
4. If all the factories (be, move) ..... out of the city 4. were moved/ would be
centre, the air pollution (be) ....... less serious. 5. would/ could
5. - Nga, please answer the phone. 6. were/ wouldn’t exist
- I (will) ....... if I (can) ...... . I’m in the bathroom. 7. hadn’t been/ would have gone
6. If there (be) ......... no sunlight, life (not, exist) ........ 8. had/ would buy
7. If I (not be) ........ tired last night, I (go) ..... out to 9. would be/ were
have a coffee with my friend. 10. had known/ would have picked
8. Mr Nhan is a poor worker but if he (have) .......
enough money, he (buy) ........ a motorbike.
9. It (be) ........ very hot if there (be) ........ two suns.
10. If I (know) ...... that you arrived in HCM last
Saturday, I (pick) ....... you up at the station.
Exercise 2 : Choose the correct answer
1. I want to buy a car, but I don't have enough Pair work
money. - Some students write down on the board.
a. If I have enough money, I buy a car. Answer key
b. If I have enough money, I will buy a car. 1. c
c. If I had enough money, I would buy a car. 2. d
d. If I had had enough money, I would have bought a 3. d
car. 4. c
2. He stepped on the mine and it exploded.
a. If he doesn't step on the mine, it doesn't explode.
b. If he doesn't step on the mine, it won't explode.
c. If he didn't step on the mine, it wouldn't explode.
d. If he hadn't stepped on the mine, it wouldn't have
exploded.
3. Unfortunately, I don't know Philosophy, so I can't
answer your question.
a. If I know Philosophy, I can answer your question.

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page192 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
b. If I know Philosophy, I will be able to answer your
question.
c. If I knew Philosophy, I would be able to answer your
question.
d. If I had known Philosophy, I would have been able to
answer your question.
4. - I have never been to a job interview before.
a. If I were you, I will dress formally.
b. If I were you, I could dress formally.
c. If I were you, I would dress formally.
d. If I were you, I can dress formally.

IV. Consolidation:
V. Homework: Revise the lesson again
1. Mr. Mills lost his job because he was late every day.
If Mr. Mills.....................................................
2. Without this treatment, the patient would have died.
If he ..............................................................
3. You can’t visit the United States unless you get a visa.
If you..........................................................
4. Unless he phones immediately, he won’t get any information
If ..............................................................
5. Unless someone has a key, we can’t get into the house.
We can only get..........................

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page193 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
D.P: 06 /05/09 Period 103
D.T: /05/09

REVIEW
A. OBJECTIVES:
I. Knowledge: Students revise the relative clauses
II. Skills: Speaking, Writing
B. PROCEDURE:
I. Settlement: Checking attendance
II. Checking: Who is absent today?
III. New lesson: Lesson 2
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1. Revision: Activity 1: Group work
- Teacher asks students: “What relative - Student discuss in groups of four and explain:
pronouns can you use in the relative clauses? Relative
Use Example
- Teacher explains: pronoun
a. Defining Relative Clauses subject or object I told you about
(Also called identifying relative clauses or who pronoun for the woman who
restrictive relative clauses) give detailed people lives next door.
subject or object Do you see the cat
information defining a general term or
pronoun for which is lying on
expression. which
animals and the roof?
- are not put in commas. things
* Imagine, Tom is in a room with five girls. referring to a He couldn't read
One girl is talking to Tom and you ask which whole sentence which surprised
me.
somebody whether he knows this girl. Here
possession for Do you know the
the relative clause defines which of the five
whose people animals boy whose mother
girls you mean. and things is a nurse?
Do you know the girl who is talking to Tom? object pronoun I was invited by
- Defining relative clauses are often used in for people, the professor
definitions. especially in whom I met at the
non-defining conference.
A seaman is someone who works on a ship. whom relative clauses
Object pronouns in defining relative clauses (in defining
can be dropped. (Sentences with a relative relative clauses
clause without the relative pronoun are called we colloquially
Contact Clauses.) prefer who)
subject or object I don't like the
The boy (who/whom) we met yesterday is very pronoun for table that stands in
nice. people, animals the kitchen.
b. Non-Defining Relative Clauses and things in
- (also called non-identifying relative clauses that
defining relative
or non-restrictive relative clauses) give clauses (who or
additional information on something, but do which are also
not define it. possible)
- are put in commas.

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page194 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10

* Imagine, Tom is in a room with only one - Students take notes


girl. The two are talking to each other and
you ask somebody whether he knows this girl.
Here the relative clause is non-defining
because in this situation it is obvious which
girl you mean.
Do you know the girl, who is talking to Tom?
- Who/ Which may not be replaced with that.
Object pronouns in non-defining relative
clauses must be used.
Jim, who/whom we met yesterday, is very Activity 2: Pair work
Expecting answer
nice.
1. The car which we bought last week is blue
2. Practice: 2. The girl whom we met at the party is a singer
Exercise 1: Combine the sentences using 3. The bananas which George bought are on the
relative clauses table
1. We bought a car last week. The car is blue. 4. The film which we watched last night was
The car ......................................................... really scary
2. The girl is a singer. We met her at the party. 5. A monk is the man who has devoted his life to
God.
The girl .................................................... 6. I have one black cat whose name is Blacky.
3. The bananas are on the table. George 7. A herbivore is an animal which feeds upon
bought them. vegetation.
The bananas ................................................. 8. Carol, who is only 9 years old, plays the piano
4. We watched a film last night. It was really brilliantly.
scary. 9. Sydney, which is not the capital of Australia,
The film ....................................................... is the largest Australian city.
5. A monk is a man. The man has devoted his 10. The new words which I have to learn are very
life to God. difficult.
A monk (tháöy
tu)...........................................
6. I have one black cat. His name is Blacky.
I have ..........................................................
7. A herbivore is an animal. The animal feeds
upon vegetation.
A herbivore (âäüng váût àn
coí)............................
8. Carol plays the piano brilliantly. She is only
9 years old.
Carol ...........................................................
9. Sydney is the largest Australian city. It is
not the capital of Australia.
Sydney ....................................................
10. I have to learn new words. They are very
difficult.
The new words ............................................
Exercise 2: Choose the correct relative
pronoun or relative adverb.
Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page195 THPT Thống Nhất
Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
1. The woman..................is sitting at the desk
is Mr. Winter's secretary.
2. I cannot remember the reason Expecting answer
....................he wanted us to leave. 1. who
3. Jane, .......................mother is a physician, 2. why
is very good at biology. 3. whose
4. She didn’t see the snake ......was lying on 4. which
the ground. 5. where
5. Do you know the shop ..............Andrew
picked me up?

IV. Consolidation:
V. Homework:

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page196 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
D.P: 06 /05/09 Period 104
D.T: /05/09

REVIEW
A. OBJECTIVES:
I. Knowledge: Students revise the passive form and to- infinitive of purposes.
II. Skills: Speaking, Writing
B. PROCEDURE:
I. Settlement: Checking attendance
II. Checking: Who is absent today?
III. New lesson: Lesson 3
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
I- PASSIVE FORMS :
- Teacher gives example and asks students to
write out the form of the passive
1. Break the glass into small pieces. - Students work in pairs
V O Be + V3 (past participle)
-> The glass is broken into small pieces. ACTIVE S V O
2. Open the boxes with a knife.
V O
-> The boxes are opened with a knife.
3. Use a hammer.
V O PASSIVE S’ (to be V3) (by O’)
-> A hammer is used.
It will be finished next week.
The film will be shown tomorrow.
- Teacher gives some more examples and asks
students to give the specific form.
Ex1:
• Films are shown at the cinema.
• Bread is sold at the baker’s. 1. Simple Present:
Ex2: Subject + am / is / are + V3
• My watch was made in Japan.
• My shoes were made in Vietnam. 2. Simple past
Ex3: Subject + was / were + V3
• The letters will be mailed next week.
3. Simple future:
• The meeting will be held tomorrow.
Subject + will be + V3
1. Active: Tom painted the chair.
- Students take notes
Passive: The chair was painted (by Tom).
2. Active: Tom painted the chair carefully
yesterday.
Passive: The chair was carefully painted (by
Tom) yesterday.
3. Active: They dry the beans in the sun.
Passive: The beans are dried in the sun.
4. Active: They have turned on the lights
Passive: The lights have been turned on.
II- Infinitive of purposes

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page197 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
For + noun/ To + infinitive: individual
purpose
If we want to express individual purpose with a
verb pattern, we are obliged to use to + - Students listen to the teacher’s explanation
infinitive: and copy.
• I stopped by at the supermarket to buy some
apples on the way home.
• I popped into his office to have a chat about
our marketing policy.
I decided to save up to buy a new computer.
For is commonly used with nouns to express
individual purpose:
• I popped into the supermarket for some
apples on the way home.
(Not: I popped into the supermarket for
buying some apples)
• I stopped by at his office for a chat about
our marketing strategy.
(Not: I stopped by at his office for having a
chat about marketing.)
• I decided I would save up for a new
computer.
(NOT: I decided I would save up for buying - Students work individually.
a new computer.) Answer key
Exercise 1: Rewrite the sentences using
infinitive of purpose
Example: 1. I’m going to Moscow to see the Kremlin.
I went to Holland because I wanted to see the 2. Paul is going to London to buy some
tulips. clothes.
-> I went to Holland to see the tulips. 3. Roger went to India to visit the Taj Mahal.
1. I’m going to Moscow because I want to see 4. Tracey often goes to the disco to dance.
the Kremlin. 5. Tim is going to America to see the Niagara
2. Paul is going to London because he wants to Falls.
buy some clothes.
3. Roger went to India because he wanted to
visit the Taj Mahal.
4. Tracey often goes to the disco because she
wants to dance.
5. Tim is going to America because he wants to
see the Niagara Falls.
Exercise 2: Change these sentences into the
passive
1. People don’t use this dictionary very often
-> This dictionary ................................................
2. They have found oil in the Antarctic (South - Students work in pairs
Pole) 1. This dictionary isn’t used very often
-> Oil ................................................................... 2. Oil has been found in the Antarctic
3. Someone gave Mary this present an hour ago. 3. Mary was given this present an hour ago
-> Mary ................................................................ (or) This present was given to Mary an hour

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page198 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10
-> This present ..................................................... ago
4. They will translate her new book into a 4. Her new book will be translated into a
number of foreign languages. number of foreign languages.
-> Her new book .................................................. 5. I was told that our teacher was sick
5. They told me that our teacher was sick.
-> I .......................................................................

IV. Consolidation:
V. Homework:

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page199 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10

Procedure:
T Stages & Content T’s activities Ss’ activities
3
15
15
10
2
I. WARM UP: Slap the pictures
II. PRE-READING:
1. Look at the map and give the Vietnamese
names for the oceans on the map
2. Name the sea animals in the pictures
3. Vocabulary:
- biodiversity (n) : ña daïng sinh hoïc
- gulf (n) : vònh
- submarine (n) : taøu ngaàm
- at stake (exp) : bò ñe doïa
- investigate (v) : ñieàu tra
III. WHILE-READING:
* Task 1: Gap-fill
* Task 2: Comprehension questions
IV. POST-READING:
- Complete the summary
- Draw the pictures of the undersea world
& tell how to preserve the sea environment
V. HOMEWORK:
Complete the lesson
-Set the scene
-Introduction
-Elicit
-Model
-Ask Ss to repeat
- Slap the board
-Pair work
-Two-groups
-Listen
-Repeat
-Copy
-Pair work
-Group work
-Pair wo

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page200 THPT Thống Nhất


Teacher: Lê Văn Ngọc English group Lesson plan 10

Năm học:2009 – 2010 Page201 THPT Thống Nhất

Вам также может понравиться